Extron XTP CrossPoint 3200 Manual

Extron XTP CrossPoint 3200 Manual
User Guide
XTP Systems
XTP CrossPoint Series
Configurable Digital Video Matrix Switchers
68-1736-01 Rev. J
06 19
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions • English
WARNING: This symbol,
, when used on the product, is intended to
alert the user of the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the
product’s enclosure that may present a risk of electric shock.
ATTENTION: This symbol,
, when used on the product, is intended
to alert the user of important operating and maintenance (servicing)
instructions in the literature provided with the equipment.
For information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF
compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the Extron Safety and
Regulatory Compliance Guide, part number 68-290-01, on the Extron
website, www.extron.com.
Sicherheitsanweisungen • Deutsch
WARNUNG: Dieses Symbol
auf dem Produkt soll den Benutzer darauf
aufmerksam machen, dass im Inneren des Gehäuses dieses Produktes
gefährliche Spannungen herrschen, die nicht isoliert sind und die einen
elektrischen Schlag verursachen können.
VORSICHT: Dieses Symbol
auf dem Produkt soll dem Benutzer in
der im Lieferumfang enthaltenen Dokumentation besonders wichtige
Hinweise zur Bedienung und Wartung (Instandhaltung) geben.
Weitere Informationen über die Sicherheitsrichtlinien, Produkthandhabung,
EMI/EMF-Kompatibilität, Zugänglichkeit und verwandte Themen finden Sie in
den Extron-Richtlinien für Sicherheit und Handhabung (Artikelnummer
68-290-01) auf der Extron-Website, www.extron.com.
Instrucciones de seguridad • Español
ADVERTENCIA: Este símbolo,
, cuando se utiliza en el producto,
avisa al usuario de la presencia de voltaje peligroso sin aislar dentro del
producto, lo que puede representar un riesgo de descarga eléctrica.
ATENCIÓN: Este símbolo,
, cuando se utiliza en el producto, avisa
al usuario de la presencia de importantes instrucciones de uso y
mantenimiento recogidas en la documentación proporcionada con el
equipo.
Para obtener información sobre directrices de seguridad, cumplimiento
de normativas, compatibilidad electromagnética, accesibilidad y temas
relacionados, consulte la Guía de cumplimiento de normativas y seguridad
de Extron, referencia 68-290-01, en el sitio Web de Extron, www.extron.com.
Instructions de sécurité • Français
AVERTISSEMENT :
Ce pictogramme,
, lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le
produit, signale à l’utilisateur la présence à l’intérieur du boîtier du
produit d’une tension électrique dangereuse susceptible de provoquer
un choc électrique.
ATTENTION : Ce pictogramme,
, lorsqu’il est utilisé sur le produit,
signale à l’utilisateur des instructions d’utilisation ou de maintenance
importantes qui se trouvent dans la documentation fournie avec le
matériel.
Pour en savoir plus sur les règles de sécurité, la conformité à la
réglementation, la compatibilité EMI/EMF, l’accessibilité, et autres sujets
connexes, lisez les informations de sécurité et de conformité Extron, réf.
68‑290-01, sur le site Extron, www.extron.com.
Istruzioni di sicurezza • Italiano
AVVERTENZA:
Il simbolo,
, se usato sul prodotto, serve ad
avvertire l’utente della presenza di tensione non isolata pericolosa
all’interno del contenitore del prodotto che può costituire un rischio di
scosse elettriche.
ATTENTZIONE: Il simbolo,
, se usato sul prodotto, serve ad avvertire
l’utente della presenza di importanti istruzioni di funzionamento e
manutenzione nella documentazione fornita con l’apparecchio.
Per informazioni su parametri di sicurezza, conformità alle normative,
compatibilità EMI/EMF, accessibilità e argomenti simili, fare riferimento
alla Guida alla conformità normativa e di sicurezza di Extron, cod. articolo
68‑290‑01, sul sito web di Extron, www.extron.com.
Instrukcje bezpieczeństwa • Polska
OSTRZEŻENIE: Ten symbol,
, gdy używany na produkt, ma na celu
poinformować użytkownika o obecności izolowanego i niebezpiecznego
napięcia wewnątrz obudowy produktu, który może stanowić zagrożenie
porażenia prądem elektrycznym.
UWAGI: Ten symbol,
, gdy używany na produkt, jest przeznaczony do
ostrzegania użytkownika ważne operacyjne oraz instrukcje konserwacji
(obsługi) w literaturze, wyposażone w sprzęt.
Informacji na temat wytycznych w sprawie bezpieczeństwa, regulacji
wzajemnej zgodności, zgodność EMI/EMF, dostępności i Tematy pokrewne,
zobacz Extron bezpieczeństwa i regulacyjnego zgodności przewodnik, część
numer 68-290-01, na stronie internetowej Extron, www.extron.com.
Инструкция по технике безопасности • Русский
ПРЕДУПРЕЖДЕНИЕ:
Данный символ,
, если указан
на продукте, предупреждает пользователя о наличии
неизолированного опасного напряжения внутри корпуса
продукта, которое может привести к поражению электрическим
током.
ВНИМАНИЕ: Данный символ,
, если указан на продукте,
предупреждает пользователя о наличии важных инструкций
по эксплуатации и обслуживанию в руководстве,
прилагаемом к данному оборудованию.
Для получения информации о правилах техники безопасности,
соблюдении нормативных требований, электромагнитной
совместимости (ЭМП/ЭДС), возможности доступа и других
вопросах см. руководство по безопасности и соблюдению
нормативных требований Extron на сайте Extron: ,
www.extron.com, номер по каталогу - 68-290-01.
安全说明 • 简体中文
警告:
产品上的这个标志意在警告用户该产品机壳内有暴露的危险 电压,
有触电危险。
注 意:
产 品 上 的 这个 标 志 意 在 提 示 用 户 设 备 随 附 的 用 户 手 册 中 有
重要的操作和维护(维修)说明。
关于我们产品的安全指南、遵循的规范、EMI/EMF 的兼容性、无障碍
使用的特性等相关内容,敬请访问 Extron 网站 , www.extron.com,参见
Extron 安全规范指南,产品编号 68-290-01。
安全記事 • 繁體中文
안전 지침 • 한국어
警 告:
若產品 上使 用此 符 號 ,是 為了提 醒 使 用者,產品 機 殼內 存 在 著
可能會導致觸電之風險的未絕緣危險電壓。
注意
若產品上使用此符號,是為了提醒使用者,設備隨附的用戶手冊中有
重要的操作和維護(維修)説明。
有關安全性指導方針、法規遵守、EMI/EMF 相容性、存取範圍和相關主題的詳細資
訊,請瀏覽 Extron 網站:www.extron.com,然後參閱《Extron 安全性與法規
遵守手冊》,準則編號 68-290-01。
경고: 이 기호
가 제품에 사용될 경우, 제품의 인클로저 내에 있는
접지되지 않은 위험한 전류로 인해 사용자가 감전될 위험이 있음을
경고합니다.
주의:
이 기호
가 제품에 사용될 경우, 장비와 함께 제공된 책자에 나와
있는 주요 운영 및 유지보수(정비) 지침을 경고합니다.
안전 가이드라인, 규제 준수, EMI/EMF 호환성, 접근성, 그리고 관련 항목에
대한 자세한 내용은 Extron 웹 사이트(www.extron.com)의 Extron 안전 및
규제 준수 안내서, 68-290-01 조항을 참조하십시오.
安全上のご注意 • 日本語
警告: この記号
が製品上に表示されている場合は、筐体内に絶縁されて
いない高電圧が流れ、感電の危険があることを示しています。
注意: この記号
が製品上に表示されている場合は、本機の取扱説明書に
記載されている重要な操作と保守(整備)の指示についてユーザーの注意
を喚起するものです。
安全上のご注意、法規厳守、EMI/EMF適合性、その他の関連項目に
ついては、エクストロンのウェブサイト www.extron.com より『Extron Safety
and Regulatory Compliance Guide』(P/N 68-290-01) をご覧ください。
Copyright
© 2015-2019 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved. www.extron.com
Trademarks
All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners.
The following registered trademarks (®), registered service marks (SM), and trademarks (TM) are the property of RGB Systems, Inc. or
Extron Electronics (see the current list of trademarks on the Terms of Use page at www.extron.com):
Registered Trademarks (®)
Extron, Cable Cubby, ControlScript, CrossPoint, DTP, eBUS, EDID Manager, EDID Minder, Flat Field, FlexOS, Global Configurator,
Global Scripter, GlobalViewer, Hideaway, HyperLane, IP Intercom, IP Link, Key Minder, LinkLicense, LockIt, MediaLink, MediaPort, NetPA,
PlenumVault, PoleVault, PowerCage, PURE3, Quantum, Show Me, SoundField, SpeedMount, SpeedSwitch, System INTEGRATOR,
TeamWork, TouchLink, V‑Lock, VideoLounge, VN‑Matrix, VoiceLift, WallVault, WindoWall, XTP, XTP Systems, and ZipClip
Registered Service Mark(SM) : S3 Service Support Solutions
Trademarks (™)
AAP, AFL (Accu‑Rate Frame Lock), ADSP (Advanced Digital Sync Processing), Auto‑Image, CableCover, CDRS (Class D Ripple
Suppression), Codec Connect, DDSP (Digital Display Sync Processing), DMI (Dynamic Motion Interpolation), Driver Configurator,
DSP Configurator, DSVP (Digital Sync Validation Processing), eLink, EQIP, Everlast, FastBite, FOX, FOXBOX, IP Intercom HelpDesk,
MAAP, MicroDigital, Opti‑Torque, PendantConnect, ProDSP, QS‑FPC (QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller), Room Agent, Scope‑Trigger,
ShareLink, SIS, Simple Instruction Set, Skew‑Free, SpeedNav, StudioStation, Triple‑Action Switching, True4K, Vector™ 4K , WebShare,
XTRA, and ZipCaddy
FCC Class A Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC rules. The Class A limits provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial
environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and,
if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful
interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause interference. This interference must be corrected at the expense of the user.
ATTENTION: The Twisted Pair Extension technology works with unshielded twisted
pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables; but to ensure FCC Class A and CE
compliance, STP cables and STP Connectors are required.
For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF
compatibility, accessibility, and related topics, see the “Extron Safety and Regulatory
Compliance Guide” on the Extron website.
Battery Notice
This product contains a battery. Do not open the unit to replace the battery. If the
battery needs replacing, return the entire unit to Extron (for the correct address, see the
Extron Warranty section on the last page of this guide).
CAUTION: Risk of explosion. Do not replace the battery with an incorrect type. Dispose
of used batteries according to the instructions.
ATTENTION : Risque d’explosion. Ne pas remplacer la pile par le mauvais type de pile.
Débarrassez-vous des piles usagées selon le mode d’emploi.
Conventions Used in this Guide
Notifications
The following notifications are used in this guide:
WARNING: Potential risk of severe injury or death.
AVERTISSEMENT : Risque potentiel de blessure grave ou de mort.
CAUTION: Risk of minor personal injury.
ATTENTION : Risque de blessure mineure.
ATTENTION:
• Risk of property damage.
• Risque de dommages matériels.
NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.
TIP:
A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.
Software Commands
Commands are written in the fonts shown here:
^AR Merge Scene,,0p1 scene 1,1 ^B 51 ^W^C.0
[01] R 0004 00300 00400 00800 00600 [02] 35 [17] [03]
E X! *X1&* X2)* X2#* X2! CE}
NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses used in this
guide, the character “0” is used for the number zero and “O” is the capital letter
“o.”
Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font
shown here:
Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32
C:\Program Files\Extron
Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx —t
SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX
Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are
written in the font shown here:
From the File menu, select New.
Click the OK button.
Specifications Availability
Product specifications are available on the Extron website, www.extron.com.
Extron Glossary of Terms
A glossary of terms is available at http://www.extron.com/technology/glossary.aspx.
Contents
Introduction................................................. 1
Guide Overview.................................................... 1
Product Description.............................................. 2
Endpoint Configuration..................................... 3
Input and Output Board and Signal Types......... 4
Features............................................................... 7
Installation................................................. 11
Setup and Installation Checklist.......................... 11
Rear Panel Cabling and Features........................ 12
Input and Output Boards................................ 14
Remote Control Ports..................................... 26
Ethernet Connection....................................... 26
Reset Button and LED.................................... 27
Power............................................................. 27
Front Panel Configuration Port and Power
LEDs................................................................. 27
Operation.................................................. 29
Front Panel Controls and Indicators.................... 29
Input and Output Buttons............................... 31
Control Buttons.............................................. 32
I/O Controls.................................................... 34
Power LEDs................................................... 34
Button Icons................................................... 35
Front Panel Operations....................................... 35
Definitions....................................................... 36
Power............................................................. 36
Front Panel Security Lockouts........................ 36
Creating a Configuration................................. 37
Viewing the Configuration............................... 41
Using Presets................................................. 44
Muting and Unmuting Video and Audio
Outputs......................................................... 46
Viewing and Adjusting the Input Audio
Level.............................................................. 48
Viewing and Adjusting the Analog Output
Volume.......................................................... 54
Setting the Front Panel Locks
(Executive Modes)......................................... 59
Performing a System Reset from the
Front Panel.................................................... 60
Background Illumination................................. 61
Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port
Protocol and Baud Rate................................ 61
Rear Panel Operations........................................ 62
Performing a Hard Reset (Reset 1).................. 64
Performing Soft System Resets
(Resets 3, 4, and 5)....................................... 65
Optimizing the Analog Audio............................... 66
RS-232 Insertion................................................ 66
Enabling Ethernet and Captive Screw
Insertion........................................................ 66
Ethernet to RS-232 Insertion.......................... 67
Captive Screw Signal Insertion........................ 69
Troubleshooting.................................................. 70
Configuration Worksheets.................................. 71
Worksheet Example 1: System Equipment..... 71
Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration...... 72
Worksheet Example 3: Test Configuration....... 73
XTP CrossPoint 3200 Matrix Switchers
Configuration Worksheet............................... 74
XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switchers
Configuration Worksheet............................... 75
Programming Guide................................... 76
Local Host-Control Ports.................................... 77
Ethernet (LAN) Port............................................ 77
Default IP addresses....................................... 77
Establishing a Connection.............................. 78
Connection Timeouts..................................... 78
Number of Connections.................................. 78
Using Verbose Mode...................................... 78
Host-to-Matrix-Switcher Instructions.................. 79
Matrix-Switcher-Initiated Messages.................... 79
Matrix Switcher Error Responses........................ 80
XTP CrossPoint Series • Contents
vii
Using the Command and Response Tables........ 80
Arrangement of Command and Response
Tables............................................................ 81
SIS Command and Response Table for
Basic Matrix Switcher Commands..................... 87
SIS Command and Response Table for
Input-Board-Specific Commands...................... 88
SIS Command and Response Table for
Input-Endpoint-Specific Commands.................. 96
SIS Command and Response Table for
Output-Board-Specific Commands................. 103
SIS Command and Response Table for
Output-Endpoint-Specific Commands............. 107
SIS Command and Response Table for
Advanced Matrix Switcher Commands............ 111
SIS command and Response Table for
IP- and Remote Port-Specific Commands....... 119
Special Characters........................................... 120
Maintenance and Modifications................ 143
HTML Operation....................................... 121
Ethernet Link.................................................... 150
Ethernet Connection..................................... 150
Default IP Address........................................ 150
Pinging to Determine the Extron
IP Address................................................... 151
Pinging to Determine the Web IP Address.... 151
Configuring the XTP CrossPoint
Series Matrix Switcher for Network
Use via the ARP Command......................... 152
Connecting as a Telnet Client........................ 153
Telnet Tips.................................................... 153
Subnetting — a Primer..................................... 155
Gateways..................................................... 155
Analog and Remote Devices......................... 155
IP Addresses and Octets.............................. 155
Subnet Masks and Octets............................ 155
Determining Whether Devices Are on the
Same Subnet.............................................. 156
Download the Startup Page.............................. 122
Status Tab........................................................ 123
System Status Page..................................... 123
DSVP Page.................................................. 124
HDCP Page.................................................. 125
Configuration Tab............................................. 126
System Settings Page.................................. 126
Passwords Page.......................................... 129
Email Settings Page...................................... 130
Firmware Upgrade Page............................... 132
File Management Tab....................................... 134
File Management Page................................. 134
Control Tab....................................................... 135
Set and View Ties Page................................ 135
Input Adjustments Page............................... 136
Output Adjustments Page............................. 137
EDID Configuration Page.............................. 140
XTP Power Page.......................................... 141
Global Presets Page..................................... 142
Mounting the Matrix Switcher........................... 143
UL Guidelines............................................... 143
Mounting Instructions................................... 144
Battery and Power Precautions........................ 144
Removing and Installing an Input or Output
Board or Blank Panel....................................... 144
Removing an Input or Output Board or
Blank Panel................................................. 144
Installing an Input or Output Board or
Blank Panel................................................. 145
Removing and Installing Button Labels............. 146
Making Labels Using the Button-Label
Generator Program...................................... 146
Making Labels from Paper Templates........... 148
Installing Labels in the Buttons...................... 148
Ethernet Connection................................ 150
XTP CrossPoint Series • Contents
viii
Introduction
This section contains basic information about this guide and the XTP CrossPoint Series.
Topics in this section include the following:
•
Guide Overview
•
Product Description
•
Features
Guide Overview
This guide contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the Extron
XTP CrossPoint1600 Matrix Switcher (see figure 1) and XTP CrossPoint 3200 Matrix
Switcher. These customizable matrix switchers support up to 16 (XTP CrossPoint1600) or
32 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) inputs and outputs.
NOTE: In this guide, the terms “XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switchers” and “matrix
switchers” refer to any of the matrix switcher models unless otherwise specified.
Extron
XTP T USW 103 4K
CONTACT
TALLY OUT
RS-232
Extron
IPCP Pro 550
R
XTP T USW 103 4K
INPUTS
1
AUDIO
1
2
SIG
3
2
3
G
1
2
3 +V
Tx Rx G
LINK
RS-232
RGB
HDMI
HDMI OUT
DISPLAYPORT
XTP OUT
LAN
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
PRESS
PRESS
HDMI
PRESS
1
DisplayPort
PRESS
125 VAC. 50-60 Hz 12A MAX
100-240V ~ 50-60Hz
+
2
-
+
1
-
2
3
T x R x G T x R x G T x R x G T x Rx G RTS CTS
POWER
12V
1A MAX
2
3
4
S G
S G
S G
S G
1
2
3
4
3
+
4
5
6
7
8
5
6
8
T x R x G T x R x G T x R x G T x Rx G RTS CTS
COM
5
6
7
8
S G
S G
S G
S G
IR/SERIAL
Cable Access Enclosure
1
2
3
XTP IN
RS-232
Ethernet
IR
Shileded
Twisted Pair
INPUTS
INPUTS
LAN
ACT
Shielded
Twisted Pair
LINK
XTP IN
XTP IN
XTP IN
SIG
LAN
SIG
INPUTS
LINK
SIG
LAN
LINK
SIG
PWR
LINK
LINK
SIG
LAN
SIG
PWR
XTP IN
L
R
L
RS-232
RESET
+
−
S/PDIF
Tx Rx G
RS-232
R
LINK
LINK
LAN
SIG
PWR
XTP IN
LAN
XTP IN
LAN
SIG
LINK
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i 4K
OVER XTP
PWR
XTP IN
LAN
XTP CP 4i FIBER 4K
OVER FIBER
LAN
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
R
L
R
Shielded
Twisted Pair
HDMI
4K Display
XTP CP 4i VGA
AUDIO
L
L
R
L
R
SIG
POWER
12V
0.7A MAX
LINK
OVER XTP
RS-232
IR
AUDIO
OUTPUTS
AUDIO
ON
L
R
+ -
+ -
RESET
OFF
+ -
XTP IN
LAN
HDMI
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RELAYS
1
2
XTP R HD 4K
RESET
S/PDIF
RS-232/422
REMOTE
LAN
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
XTP OUT
XTP OUT
XTP OUT
SIG
SIG
LINK
LAN
LINK
SIG
PWR
SIG
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP OUT
LAN
LAN
SIG
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP OUT
LAN
SIG
LAN
LINK
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP OUT
R
L
RS-232
IR
R
XTP CP 4o FIBER 4K
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
XTP CP 4o 4K
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4o SA
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
L
XTP Receiver
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
OVER XTP
LAN
OUTPUTS
HD
SELECT
DIRECTV
L
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LINK
PWR
XTP OUT
LAN
R
OVER FIBER
RS-232
LAN
OUTPUTS
9−12
L
XTP OUT
5−8
OUTPUTS
R
Extron
XTP R HD 4K
XTP II CP 4o HD 4K PLUS
AUDIO
L
1−4
100-240V 12.0A MAX
DIRECTV
R
INPUTS
DISCONNECT POWER
CORD BEFORE
SERVICING
720p 1080i 1080p
L
XTP IN
9−12
XTP Transmitter
480p
R
RS-232
PUSH
480
REMOTE
2
13−16
Extron
XTP T UWP 202 4K
RES
1
Ethernet
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS
AUDIO
L
1−4
AUDIO IN
Ethernet
MENU
4K Display
RELAYS
HDMI IN
5−8
GUIDE
R
+ −
HDMI
Ethernet
INPUTS
PWR HDCP HDMI PC
VGA IN
POWER
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LAN
G
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
PUSH
OUTPUTS
AUDIO
L
ON
Extron
XTP SR HD 4K
LAN
4
FLEX I/O
RELAYS
AUDIO
IR
OFF
Shielded
Twisted Pair
Laptop
OVER XTP
RS-232
XTP Scaling
Receiver
Ethernet
Extron
Cable Cubby 700
HDMI
LINK
+ V + S -S G
eBUS
4
- + 12 VDC
SIG
IPCP PRO 550
PW R OU T = 12W
SWITCHED 12 VDC
40W MAX TOTAL
5A MAX
HDMI
House Network Switch
1
7
Ethernet
IR
IP Link Control
Processor
VGA
USB CHARGER
10" Tabletop TouchLink Pro
Touchpanel
Ethernet
XTP Transmitter
POWER
12V
--A MAX
Extron
TLP Pro 1022T
Ethernet
AV Control
Network
R
L
R
13−16
HDMI
Satellite Receiver
HDMI
50-60Hz
Shielded
Twisted Pair
Ethernet
Extron
XTP CrossPoint 1600
Audio
Modular Digital
Matrix Switcher
100-240V
HDMI
OPEN/CLOSE
US AUDIO/VIDEO
LISTED
Shielded
Twisted Pair
FL OFF
XPA 1002
17TT
C
STANDBY/ON
PQLS
4K Display
1.3A, 50-60Hz
CLASS 2 WIRING
APPARATUS
LEVEL
1
LIMITER/
PROTECT
2
1
INPUTS
REMOTE
10V
2
1
2
50 mA
VOL/MUTE
OUTPUT
2
1
SIGNAL
0
0
STANDBY
USB
UHD Blu-ray
HDMI
INPUTS
POWER
12V
0.7A MAX
HDMI
XTP T HD 4K
Extron
XPA 1002
IR
OFF
OVER XTP
AUDIO
AUDIO
ON
LOOP THRU
L
+
RS-232
R
−
+
−
SIG
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Ethernet
RESET
XTP OUT
LAN
Extron
XTP T HD 4K
XTP Transmitter
Audio
VGA
PC
Stereo Power
Amplifier
INPUTS
POWER
12V
--A MAX
UNIVERSAL
AUDIO
LOOP THRU
XTP T VGA
OVER XTP
RS-232
SIG
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RESET
XTP OUT
LAN
Extron
SI 28
Surface Mount
Speakers
Extron
XTP T VGA
XTP Transmitter
Figure 1.
Typical XTP CrossPoint Application
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
1
Product Description
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switchers are configurable, modular switchers that
distribute a variety of video, audio, and data types, depending on its configuration. A matrix
switcher routes any input signal to any combination of outputs. It can route multiple signals
at once.
The XTP CrossPoint Series models are assembled from user-installed and hot-swappable
input and output boards in the following quantities:
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — Supports up to four input boards and four output boards.
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — Supports up to eight input boards and eight output boards.
The table below identifies the various types of input boards and output boards currently
available, each of which can receive (input boards) or output (output boards) up to four
signals (see Input and Output Boards and Signal Types on page 4 for details).
Available Input and Output Board Table
Input Boards
Output Boards
XTP CP 4i and XTP CP 4i 4K (XTP input board)
Receives inputs from Extron XTP transmitters and local
serial port and IR inserts.
XTP CP 4o and XTP CP 4o 4K (XTP output board)
Outputs signals to Extron XTP receivers, Includes local
serial port and IR inserts.
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K (fiber optic input board)
Receives fiber optic and local serial port and IR inserts.
XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K (fiber optic output board)
Outputs fiber optic outputs. Includes local serial port
and IR inserts.
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS (HDMI input board)
Receives 4K HDMI signals and analog audio inputs.
XTP II CP 4o HD 4K PLUS (HDMI output board)
Outputs 4K HDMI nd analog audio outputs. Output is
HDCP-compliant if the input is HDCP-compliant.
XTP CP 4i HDMI (HDMI input board)
Receives HDMI signals and analog audio inputs.
XTP CP 4o HDMI (HDMI output board)
Outputs HDMI and analog audio outputs. Output is
HDCP-compliant if the input is HDCP-compliant.
XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA (HDMI input board)
Receives HDMI signals and analog audio inputs.
SUpports audio downmixing.
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro (DVI Pro input board)
Receives DVI Pro signals and analog audio inputs.
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro (DVI Pro output board)
Outputs DVI Pro signals and analog audio outputs.
XTP CP 4o SA (Analog audio output board)
Outputs analog audio outputs.
XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI (3G-SDI input board)
Receives 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, and SDI video inputs and
analog audio inputs.
XTP CP 4i VGA (universal analog VGA input board)
Receives RGBHV, RGBs, RGsB, HDTV, and YUV
component video, S-video, and composite video
analog inputs and analog audio inputs.
The input boards convert their non-XTP inputs into the digital XTP format used by Extron
XTP transmitters and receivers and place them on the matrix switcher backplane. The
output boards with non-XTP outputs convert the XTP signal to the appropriate format
for that output board type. Thus, as a system, the XTP CrossPoint matrix switchers can
transcode inputs in any valid format to the output formats supported by the family of
output boards, making them single box solutions to complex digital video signal routing
applications. Each input and output is individually isolated and buffered, and any input can
be switched to any one or all outputs with virtually no crosstalk or signal noise between
channels.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
2
By adding or removing I/O boards within certain rules are detailed in Input and Output
Boards on page 14, you can expand and contract the matrix switcher from a 4-input by
4-output matrix to up to:
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — A 16-input by 16-output matrix
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — A 32-input by 32 output matrixThe matrix switchers can be
remotely controlled via their rear panel Remote
RS-232/RS-422 ports, their rear panel LAN port, and their front panel Configuration
(USB) port by any of the following:
•
A control system
•
A PC
•
An Extron MKP 2000 remote control panel
•
An Extron MKP 3000 remote control panel
•
(RS-232/RS-422 only) An Extron MCP 100 remote control panel
•
(RS-232/RS-422 only) An Extron MKP 1000 remote keypad
Control can be via the Extron XTP System Configuration Software, the Simple Instruction
Set (SIS), or HTML pages (LAN port control only). The SIS is a set of basic ASCII code
commands (see Programming Guide on page 76) that provide simple control through a
control system or PC. The built-in Web pages (see HTML operation on page 121) can be
accessed via the LAN port using a Web browser such as the Microsoft® Internet Explorer®.
The matrix switchers are housed in rack-mountable, metal enclosures with mounting flanges
for standard 19-inch racks.
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — 5U high
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — 10U high
The base XTP CrossPoint1600 ships with two internal power supplies on a single AC
connection that provide 12 V and 48 V. It can be ordered with two additional optional
redundant (12 V and 48 V) power supplies. The customer cannot install the redundant
power supplies.
The XTP CrossPoint 3200 ships with three 12 V internal power supplies and one 48 V
power supply, on a single AC connection. The matrix switcher can operate using two of the
12 V supplies with the third as a hot backup. The fourth supply provides power over the
XTP connection to remote devices (Power over XTP [PoX]).
The 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz power supplies in the XTP CrossPoint 1600 and
XTP CrossPoint 3200 provide worldwide power compatibility and reliability. Front panel
LEDs indicate good and failed status for each supply.
Endpoint Configuration
In an XTP system, the transmitters connected to the input boards and the receivers
connected to the output boards are known as “endpoints.”
When you configure an XTP system (consisting of an XTP CrossPoint matrix switcher and
its connected endpoints), connect a computer to the matrix switcher and configure the
endpoints from the matrix switcher. Do not connect the computer directly to the endpoint
for configuration when it is part of an XTP system.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
3
Input and Output Board and Signal Types
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switchers are assembled from user-installed and
hot-swappable input and output boards. This section details the signal types processed by
each board and the function of boards.
The boards have a primary signal type that is identified by the name of the board and used
as the subsections of the Primary signal type, by board section starting on the next
page. Most boards have secondary signal types that are used as the subsections of the
Secondary signal type on page 7.
See the tables below and the following subsections for an explanation of the various input
and output board capabilities.
Input Board Signal Type Table
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog Audio
Dedicated UARTs
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K
RS-232 Inserts
Analog Video
3G/HD-SDI/SDI
DVI Pro
HDMI
•
Remote Power
XTP CP 4i and XTP CP 4i 4K
HDMI 4K
Input Board
Fiber
XTP
Signal Type
•
XTP CP 4i HDMI
•
•
XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA
•
•
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
•
XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI
•
•
XTP CP 4i VGA
•
•
•
XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS
XTP CP 4o HDMI
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro
•
•
•
•
•
•
Analog Audio
Dedicated UARTs
DVI Pro
HDMI
HDMi 4K
•
RS-232 Inserts
XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K
•
Remote Power
XTP CP 4o and XTP CP 4o 4K
Fiber
Output Board
XTP
Output Board Signal Type Table
•
•
•
•
XTP CP 4o SA
•
•
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
4
Primary signal type, by board
XTP input and output boards
The XTP boards are essentially receivers (input boards) and transmitters (output boards).
The input board receives up to four XTP inputs, on either Extron XTP DTP 24 SF/UTP cable
or shielded Category 5e, 6, or 7 (CAT x) shielded twisted pair (STP) cable, terminated with
RJ-45 connectors, from Extron XTP transmitters.
The output board transmits XTP signals to as many as four XTP receivers.
The XTP signals can include digital video signals (or digitized analog video if the tied
input is from a universal VGA input board), audio, RS-232, IR, Ethernet, and remote
power capability. A second RJ-45 connector is present that allows you to insert Ethernet
communications onto the XTP cable to passively extend them to a LAN (Ethernet) port on
the connected endpoint. The maximum transmission distance is 330 feet (100 m).
Each XTP board features remote power (48 VDC @ 13 watts per output) on the XTP inputs
and outputs for XTP transmitters and receivers.
Both XTP boards also support RS-232 inputs and dedicated universal asynchronous
receiver/transmitters (UARTs) (see Serial port inserts and Dedicated UARTs, both on
page 7).
Fiber input and output boards
The fiber input boards have four fiber optic input connectors. The fiber output boards have
four fiber optic output connectors. The boards are compatible with any Extron fiber “Plus”
product. The fiber signals can include digital video signals, audio, RS-232, and IR.
An RJ-45 connector is present that allows you to insert Ethernet communications onto the
fiber cable to passively extend them to a LAN (Ethernet) port on the connected endpoint.
Both fiber boards also support RS-232 inputs and dedicated UARTs (see Serial port
inserts and Dedicated UARTs).
The boards are further categorized by the type of fiber optic cable, multimode or
singlemode, which defines the effective range of transmission:
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K MM — Multimode, long distance, up to 500 m (1640 feet) (depending
on the fiber cable)
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K SM — Singlemode, very long distance, up to 10 km (6.2 miles)
NOTE: The multimode and singlemode boards are physically and functionally identical,
with the exception of the effective range of transmission. In this guide, any reference
applies to either transmission mode unless otherwise specified.
HDMI 4K, HDMI, and DVI Pro input and output boards
The HDMI input boards have four HDMI input connectors. The HDMI output boards have
four HDMI output connectors. The boards also support digital DVI-D signals with adapters.
The DVI Pro input board has four DVI-I input connectors. The DVI Pro output board has
four DVI-I output connectors. Although equipped with DVI-I connectors, the DVI Pro boards
support digital DVI-D signals (and HDMI connectors with adapters) only.
The boards meet the DVI 1.0 and HDMI 1.3 specifications, support a maximum
resolution of 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz and 1080p @ 60 Hz (deep color), and are HDCP-compliant.
The output boards perform down-conversion automatic color bit depth to match the signal
to display capabilities.
All digital video input boards support 256 bytes of EDID and can save, import, and export
EDID data.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
5
HDMI input boards and DVI Pro input boards both also have four analog balanced stereo
inputs on captive screw connectors (see Analog audio inputs on the next page). HDMI
output boards and DVI Pro output boards both also have four analog balanced stereo
outputs on captive screw connectors (see Analog audio outputs on the next page).
DMA input boards
The DMA input boards provide multi-channel audio downmixing to 2-channel PCM stereo
audio for separable audio routing. They can decode and process licensed, branded digital
source formats from Dolby®1 and DTS®2, including Dolby TrueHD and DTS-HD Master
Audio™.
3G-SDI, HD-SDI, or SDI video input boards
NOTE: 4K video can be routed only to boards that support that resolution.
The 3G/HD-SDI/SDI video input board automatically recognizes and accepts common
SMPTE and ITU serial digital data rates, including 2.97 Gbps 3G-SDI, 1.485 Gbps HD-SDI,
and 270 Mbps SDI with automatic input equalization. Each input has a buffered and
re-clocked loop-through outputs. The 3G input board converts the incoming signal to digital
Transition Minimized Differential Signaling (TMDS, the core technology used in HDMI and
DVI) before converting to the XTP format used on the backplane.
The board also has four analog balanced stereo inputs on captive screw connectors (see
Analog audio inputs).
VGA universal analog input boards
The VGA universal analog video input board accepts RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, HDTV
component video, YUV component video, S-video, or composite video on 15-pin HD
connectors. S-video and composite video require BNC to VGA adapters. The inputs feature
auto-detect as the default condition, which automatically recognizes the input signal with no
user configuration. The input format can also be forced via remote control.
The VGA input board converts the incoming signal to digital TMDS, the core technology
used in HDMI and DVI, before converting to the XTP format used on the backplane. The
board de-interlaces and digitizes S-video and composite video to NTSC 480p or PAL 576p.
The VGA input board delivers one block of 128 bytes of analog DDC/EDID handshake data
for each input that can be used as an EDID reference for each of the source devices. If no
output references are stored, the matrix switcher can use one of the stored EDID data files.
The VGA input board also have four analog balanced stereo inputs on captive screw
connectors (see Analog audio inputs).
Analog audio output boards
The audio output board has four analog stereo audio output connectors for balanced or
unbalanced 2-channel audio. These boards extract 2-channel audio from the embedded
stream for analog audio outputs with mute and audio volume controls.
1.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
2.
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS, Inc. DTS, the Symbol,
DTS in combination with the Symbol, the DTS-HD logo, and DTS-HD Master Audio are registered trademarks
or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. © DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
6
Secondary signal type
Serial port inserts
The XTP and fiber input and output boards also have four local RS-232 and IR insert inputs
on captive screw connectors. The insert inputs support up to a 115k baud rate. Each
RS-232 and IR insert and local output is for the associated input or output only and cannot
be tied to other outputs or inputs.
Dedicated UARTs — Ethernet insertion
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can send control signals to inputs and outputs
on the XTP and fiber input and output boards using dedicated UART ports. Each XTP and
fiber input and output has a dedicated UART port to allow bidirectional communication on
every XTP port simultaneously. Once the Ethernet-to-RS-232 feature is enabled, via the XTP
Configuration Software or an SIS command, the XTP input or output is unable to pass any
RS-232 commands from the local insert connections on the I/O board but instead passes
the communications via the UART.
Analog audio inputs
Boards listed in the table on page 4 as supporting analog audio input have four stereo
audio input captive screw connectors for balanced or unbalanced 2-channel audio. These
boards can perform analog-to-digital conversion of analog audio inputs for audio breakaway
ties. Analog audio input levels can be adjusted through a range of +24 dB gain through
–18 dB attenuation.
Analog audio outputs
Boards listed in the table as supporting analog audio output have four stereo audio output
captive screw connectors for balanced or unbalanced 2-channel audio. These boards
extract 2-channel audio from the embedded stream for analog audio outputs with mute and
audio volume controls.
Features
•
Available in I/O sizes from 4x4 to 32x32 — System configuration is flexible to match
a wide variety of small to large-sized installations.
•
15.2 Gbps data-rate digital backplane — Ensures switching and distribution of
video signals without degradation, offering the performance required to maintain signal
integrity with the most demanding high resolution signals.
•
Compatible with all XTP integrated system products — XTP CrossPoint Series is
a flexible, reliable signal switching and distribution system that provides a completely
integrated solution for multiple digital and analog formats.
•
Fully digital signal routing — Analog signals are digitized, sending a reliable, high
quality digital video signal to the output destination.
•
Wide selection of input and output boards — Boards provide integration for a
variety of signal types and formats, ensuring system customization appropriate for a
wide range of applications.
•
Serial port insertion from the Ethernet control port — System level device
control to all remote locations via the Ethernet port of the matrix switcher, providing
comprehensive control of endpoints and attached devices without needing additional
cabling.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
7
•
Remote power to XTP transmitters and receivers — To simplify installation in
space-challenged locations, an XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can provide
power to remote XTP transmitters and receivers over the same STP cable that is used
for sending AV signals. This avoids the need for external power supplies at remote
endpoints.
•
HDMI compatible — Supports HDMI specification features, including data rates up
to 15.2 Gbps, Deep Color up to 12-bit, 3D formats, Lip Sync, and HD lossless audio
formats.
•
HDCP compliant — Ensures display of content-protected media and interoperability
with other HDCP-compliant devices.
•
HDCP authentication and signal confirmation via RS-232 or Ethernet —
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher provides real-time verification of HDCP
status for each digital video input and output. This allows for simple, quick, and easy
signal and HDCP verification through RS-232/RS-422 or Ethernet, providing valuable
feedback to a system operator or helpdesk support staff.
•
HDCP Visual Confirmation provides a green signal when encrypted content
is sent to a non-compliant display — A full-screen green signal is sent when
HDCP-encrypted content is transmitted to a non-HDCP compliant display, providing
immediate visual confirmation that protected content cannot be viewed on the display.
•
SpeedSwitch Technology — Provides exceptional switching speed for
HDCP-encrypted content.
•
SD Pro processing provides deinterlacing of standard definition video —
Deinterlaces 480i and 576i signals for compatibility with HDMI and DVI-equipped
displays, without the need for additional scalers.
•
EDID Minder — Automatically manages EDID communication between connected
devices, ensuring that all sources power up properly and reliably output content for
display.
•
Key Minder — Continuously verifies HDCP compliance for quick, reliable switching.
Authenticates and maintains continuous HDCP encryption between input and output
devices to ensure quick and reliable switching in professional AV environments, while
enabling simultaneous distribution of a single source signal to one or more displays.
•
Modular, field-upgradeable and hot-swappable design — The XTP CrossPoint
Series matrix switcher provides substantial flexibility, expandability, and affordability
by allowing users to select the configuration required for a system. Additional input
and output boards may be added at any time for quick and easy upgradeability or
expansion. Hot-swappable components allow the user to replace an I/O board at any
time without the need to power down the matrix switcher. This is especially useful for
mission-critical applications that require continuous system operation.
•
Audio breakaway — Provides the capability to separate an embedded audio signal
from its corresponding video signal within the matrix switcher, allowing the audio and
video signals from one source to be switched to different destinations.
•
Ethernet extension — Centralized 10/100 Ethernet communication can be
implemented via an Ethernet pass-through port to reduce the amount of independent
network drops required within a system.
•
Digital output boards provide +5 VDC, 250 mA power on each output for
powering external peripheral devices — Power provided via the digital output of
a board eliminates the need of a separate power supply for the connected peripheral
device.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
8
•
Automatic cable equalization for each digital input to 100 feet (30 m) when
used with Extron HDMI or DVI Pro cables — Cable input equalization optimizes
signal performance for all incoming signals, ensuring pristine image quality is delivered
throughout an XTP CrossPoint System.
•
Automatic output reclocking — Reshapes and restores timing of digital video signals
at each output, eliminating high frequency jitter to ensure reliable transmission over long
cables.
•
Audio input gain and attenuation — Allows the level of gain or attenuation to be set,
eliminating noticeable volume differences when switching between sources.
•
Audio output volume adjustment and muting — Audio output can be set
dynamically for each channel through the front panel or serial control eliminating the
need for audio preamplifiers in many system designs.
•
Ethernet monitoring and control — Engineered to meet the needs of professional AV
environments, Ethernet control provides proactive monitoring and system management
over a LAN, WAN, or the Internet, using standard TCP/IP protocols. Ethernet control
provides for remote selection of input and output ties, adjustment and control of audio
input and output levels, and advanced system diagnostics.
•
Tri-color, backlit buttons — Buttons can be custom labeled for easy identification.
The buttons illuminate red, green, or amber, depending on function, for ease of use in
low-light environments.
•
QuickSwitch Front Panel Controller (QS-FPC) — Provides a discrete button for
each input and output, allowing for simple, intuitive operation.
•
Global presets — Frequently used I/O configurations may be saved and recalled either
from the front panel, serial, or Ethernet control. This time-saving feature allows I/O
configurations to be set up and stored in memory for future use.
•
View I/O mode — Users can easily view which inputs and outputs are actively
connected.
•
Front panel configuration port — Enables easy configuration without having to
access rear panel of the matrix switcher.
•
Front panel security lockout — Prevents unauthorized use in non-secure
environments. In Lock mode, a special button combination is required to operate the
matrix switcher from the front panel controller.
•
Optional remote control — The optional MKP 2000 and MKP 3000 X-Y Remote
Control Panels provide the flexibility to control the matrix switcher from a remote
location.
•
JITC Certified — Successfully completed interoperability and information assurance
testing for use in government applications and other mission-critical environments.
•
Rack-mountable 5U (XTP CrossPoint 1600) or 10U (XTP CrossPoint 3200) full rack
width metal enclosure.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
9
•
Internal universal power supply — The 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, international power
supply provides worldwide power compatibility.
•
Primary and redundant power supplies — Redundant power supplies (optional
for the XTP CrossPoint 1600, standard for the XTP CrossPoint 3200) are available for
continuous, mission-critical applications where power reliability is crucial.
•
Permanent, rechargeable battery — The matrix switcher has a rechargeable lithium
battery to track time of day when power is disconnected.
WARNING: There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace it only with the same or equivalent type recommended by
the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions of the
manufacturer.
AVERTISSEMENT : Si la pile est mal remplacée, il y a un risque d’explosion.
Remplacez la batterie seulement avec le même type ou un type similaire de pile,
recommandé par le fabricant. Débarrassez-vous des piles utilisées selon les
instructions du fabricant.
ATTENTION:
• Non-Extron personnel must not attempt to remove the battery. Doing so voids
the warranty.
• Du personnel ne faisant pas partie d’Extron ne doit pas essayer de retirer la
batterie. Cela annulerait la garantie.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Introduction
10
Installation
This section details the installation and configuration of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix
switchers, including:
•
Setup and Installation Checklist
•
Rear Panel Cabling and Features
•
Front Panel Configuration Port and Power LEDs
Setup and Installation Checklist
Get ready
Familiarize yourself with the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher.
Obtain IP setting information for the matrix switcher from the local network administrator
(see Ethernet Connection on page 150).
Configure the matrix switcher
Install the desired input and output boards (see Installing an Input or Output Board
or Blank Panel on page 145). Use a screwdriver to tighten the captive screws that
lock the boards in place.
Perform physical installation
If desired, create and replace button labels (see Removing and Installing Button
Labels on page 146).
If desired install the matrix switcher in a rack (see Mounting the Matrix Switcher on
page 143).
Cable input and output devices to the input and output boards (see Input and Output
Boards on page 14).
If desired, connect computers or control systems to any of the remote control ports (a
serial port [see Remote Control Ports on page 26], a USB port [see Configuration
port on page 27], and a LAN port [see Ethernet Connection on page 26]) on the
matrix switcher.
Connect power (see Power on page 27).
Test the matrix switcher by creating a tie (see Example 1: Create a set of video and
audio ties on page 38).
Ancillary operations
Install the XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System Configuration
Software Help file).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
11
Rear Panel Cabling and Features
Figure 2 shows an XTP CrossPoint 1600. Figure 3 on the next page shows an
XTP CrossPoint 3200. The models have similar features, but different-sized enclosures and
a different arrangement of the features.
F
AB
C D
E
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
1−4
1−4
INPUTS
INPUTS
5−8
9−12
5−8
9−12
13−16
13−16
REMOTE
RS-232/RS-422
LAN
RESET
RESET
RS-232/422
REMOTE
1−4
OUTPUTS
OUTPUTS
9−12
100-240V 12.0A MAX
13−16
ACT
LINK
1−4
5−8
DISCONNECT POWER
CORD BEFORE
SERVICING
LAN
5−8
9−12
13−16
50-60Hz
100-240V -- A MAX
50-60Hz
Figure 2.
XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher Rear Panel
ATTENTION:
• Use electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions (be electrically grounded) when
making connections. Electrostatic discharge can damage equipment, even if you
cannot feel, see, or hear it.
• Prenez des précautions contre les décharges électrostatiques (ESD) (soyez
électriquement relié à la terre) lorsque vous effectuez des connexions. Les
décharges électrostatiques peuvent endommager l’équipement, même si vous ne
pouvez pas le sentir, le voir ou l’entendre.
• Remove system power before making all connections.
• Débranchez l’alimentation du système avant de faire n’importe quelle connexion.
A
B
C
D
E
F
Input boards space (see page 14)
Output boards space (see page 17)
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port (see page 26)
LAN port (Ethernet connector) (see page 26)
Reset button and LED (see page 27)
Power connector (see page 27)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
12
C DE
A
B
XTP CrossPoint 3200
1-4
5-8
9-12
INPUTS
13-16
17-20
21-24
25-28
29-32
1-4
5-8
9-12
OUTPUTS
13-16
17-20
21-24
25-28
29-32
RS-232/422
REMOTE
1
5
4
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
9 13 17 21 25 29
LAN
RESET
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
1
5
4
8 12 16 20 24 28 32
9 13 17 21 25 29
50-60Hz
100-240V 12A MAX
I
N
P
U
T
S
DISCONNECT POWER
CORD BEFORE
SERVICING
F
Figure 3.
A
B
C
D
E
F
XTP CrossPoint 3200 Matrix Switcher Rear Panel
Input boards space (see page 14)
Output boards space (see page 17)
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port (see page 26)
LAN connection (Ethernet connector) (see page 26)
Reset button and LED (see page 27)
Power connector (see page 27)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
13
Input and Output Boards
On the XTP CrossPoint 1600, the top slots are for input boards and the bottom slots are for
output boards. On the XTP CrossPoint 3200, slots on the left are for input boards and slots
on the right are for output boards. Each board installed in a slot supports up to four inputs or
outputs of the applicable type (see Input and Output Boards and Signal Types on
page 4, Input boards space below, and Output boards space on page 17).
Input boards can be installed in any order in the input slot locations. Output boards can
likewise be installed in any order in the output slot locations. You can skip a slot with the only
result being that the inputs or outputs serviced by that slot location are not present in the
matrix. For example, if you omit installing a board in input slot 3, inputs 9 through 12 are not
present and the first connector in input slot 4 remains input 13.
NOTE: Audio ground pins on the input and output boards may be labeled as
The wiring and function are the same, whichever way the board is labeled.
A
or .
Input boards space —
NOTE: See figure 2 on page 12 and figure 3 on page 13.
Install input boards as desired in input slots 1 through 4 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) or slots
1 through 8 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) and make connections. See Installing the Input
or Output Board or Blank Panel on page 145 and the individual board descriptions
below.
NOTE: Install blank panels in unused locations to ensure proper ventilation.
XTP CP 4i and XTP CP 4i 4K (XTP input board)
1
SIG
INPUTS
3
1
LINK
SIG
PWR
3
SIG
PWR
XTP IN
2
Figure 4.
2
3
SIG
3
LINK
2
XTP IN
LAN
XTP CP 4i 4K
OVER XTP
PWR
XTP IN
LAN
1
LINK
PWR
XTP IN
LAN
1
LINK
LAN
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
2
4
XTP Input Board Connectors and Indicators (XTP CP 4i 4K)
ATTENTION:
• The XTP input board can provide power over XTP (PoX) to connected devices.
PoX is intended for indoors use only. No part of a network that uses PoX can
be routed outdoors.
• La carte entrée XTP peut fournir l’alimentation sur XTP (PoX) aux appareils
connectés. PoX est destiné à une utilisation en intérieur uniquement. Aucune
partie d’un réseau qui utilise PoX ne peut être routée en extérieur.
NOTE: PoX must be enabled using:
• SIS commands (see the applicable XTP Power SIS commands on page 93)
• Built-in HTML pages (see XTP Power Page on page 141)
• The XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System Configuration
Software Help File, available at www.extron.com)
1
XTP input connectors — Connect an STP cable between a compatible Extron
XTP transmitter and this connector (see TP connectors on page 19 to wire the
connector).
2
XTP power indicators — Light to indicate that the input board is providing power
over XTP (PoX) to the transmitter connected to this RJ-45 connector.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
14
3
LAN (Ethernet connectors — As desired, connect a TP cable between a host
device or control LAN and this connector for passive extension to the LAN (Ethernet
connector on the connected endpoint (see TP connectors on page 19 to wire
the connector).
4
IR/RS-232 Over XTP connectors — If desired, connect serial RS-232 signals,
modulated IR signals, or both to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors
for bidirectional RS-232 and IR communications on the associated inputs (see
RS-232 and IR connectors on page 22 to wire the connectors).
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K (fiber optic input board)
INPUTS
XTP IN
XTP IN
XTP IN
XTP IN
SIG
LAN
2
1
Figure 5.
1
LINK
LAN
SIG
2
LINK
1
LAN
2
SIG
LINK
1
LAN
2
SIG
XTP CP 4i FIBER 4K
OVER FIBER
RS-232
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
1
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
3
Fiber Optic Input Board Connectors and Indicators
XTP In connectors — Connect a fiber optic cable between the Tx connector
on a compatible Extron fiber optic transmitter and this connector. This board
uses small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules with industry-standard LC fiber
optics connectors to provide reliable physical connectivity and precise fiber core
alignment.
Signal LED — Indicates that a cable is connected to a fiber optic transmitter.
Link LED — Indicates that a valid fiber optic signal is detected.
2
LAN (Ethernet) connectors — As desired, connect a TP cable between a
host device or control LAN and this connector for passive extension to the LAN
(Ethernet) connector on the connected endpoint (see TP connectors on page
19 to wire the connector).
3
IR/RS-232 Over Fiber connectors — If desired, connect serial RS-232 signals,
modulated IR signals, or both to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors
for bidirectional RS-232 and IR communications on the associated inputs (see
RS-232 and IR connectors on page 22 to wire the connectors).
XTP II CP 4i 4K PLUS and XTP CP 4i HDMI (HDMI input boards)
INPUTS
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS
AUDIO
L
1
Figure 6.
1
1
R
L
R
1
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
2
4K HDMI Input Board Connectors
IN
XTP CP 4i HDMI
AUDIO
6
Figure 7.
6
6
6
R
L
R
IN
L
7
HDMI Input Board Connectors
1
Input connectors — Connect an HDMI cable between this port and the HDMI
output port of the digital video source (see HDMI connectors on page 22 for
pin assignments and to use the LockIt HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket to secure the
connector to the transmitter).
2
Audio Inputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect balanced or
unbalanced stereo audio inputs to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw
connectors (see Analog audio input connectors on the page 24 to
wire the connectors).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
15
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro (DVI Pro input board)
IN
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
AUDIO
8
Figure 8.
8
8
R
L
R
8
L
R
L
R
IN
L
7
DVI Pro Input Board Connectors
NOTE: Although the DVI Pro boards use DVI-I connectors, the matrix switchers
handle only DVI-D (digital) video.
1
Input connectors — Connect a DVI cable between this port and the DVI output
port of the digital video source (see DVI connectors on page 23 for pin
assignments).
2
Audio inputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect balanced or
unbalanced stereo audio inputs to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw
connectors (see Analog audio input connectors on page 24 to wire
the connectors).
XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI (3G/HD-SDI/SDI input board)
IN
INPUT
LOOP OUT
INPUT
LOOP OUT
INPUT
LOOP OUT
INPUT
Figure 9.
¢
9
¢
9
¢
9
R
L
R
¢
L
R
L
R
IN
L
9
XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI
AUDIO
LOOP OUT
7
3G Input Board Connectors
INPUT
LOOP OUT
1
Input connectors — Connect a 3G-SDI, HD-SDI, or SDI video
input to this BNC connector. The board also accepts embedded
digital audio on this port.
2
Loop Out connector — Connect a local digital display to this BNC connector for
a buffered loop-through on the input signal.
NOTE: The board ships with 75 ohm terminators on the Loop Out connectors.
Extron recommends leaving these installed when the loop out is not used.
3
Audio inputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect balanced or
unbalanced stereo audio inputs to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw
connectors (see Analog audio input connectors on page 24 to wire
the connectors).
XTP CP 4i VGA (VGA Input board)
IN
XTP CP 4i VGA
AUDIO
1
Figure 10.
1
1
R
L
1
R
L
R
L
R
IN
L
2
VGA Input Board Connectors
1
Input connectors — Connect a VGA cable between this port
and the analog video output port of the digital video source (see
Analog video connectors on page 23 for pin assignments and
non-RGB video formats).
2
Audio Inputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect balanced or
unbalanced stereo audio inputs to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw
connectors (see Analog audio input connectors on page 24 to wire
the connectors).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
16
B
Output boards space —
NOTE: See figure 2 on page 12 and figure 3 on page 13.
Install output boards as desired in output slots 1 through 4 (XTP CrossPoint 1600),
slots 1 through 8 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) and make connections. See Installing the
Input or Output Board or Blank Panel on page 145 and the individual board
descriptions below.
NOTE:
• Install blank panels in unused slots to ensure proper ventilation.
• XTP CrossPoint 3200: To ensure reliable operation, it is recommended that
unused output slots (especially slots 5 through 8) be populated with either
active output boards or load boards.
XTP CP 4o and XTP CP 4o 4K (XTP Output board)
1
SIG
OUTPUTS
3
1
LINK
SIG
PWR
3
SIG
PWR
XTP OUT
2
Figure 11.
2
3
SIG
3
LINK
2
XTP OUT
LAN
XTP CP 4o 4K
OVER XTP
PWR
XTP OUT
LAN
1
LINK
PWR
XTP OUT
LAN
1
LINK
LAN
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
RS-232 IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
2
4
XTP Output Board Connectors and Indicators (XTP CP 4o 4K)
ATTENTION:
• The XTP output board can provide power over XTP (PoX) to connected
devices. PoX is intended for indoors use only. No part of a network that uses
PoX can be routed outdoors.
• La carte sortie XTP peut fournir l’alimentation sur XTP (PoX) aux appareils
connectés. PoX est destiné à une utilisation en intérieur uniquement. Aucune
partie d’un réseau qui utilise PoX ne peut être routée en extérieur.
NOTE: PoX must be enabled using:
• SIS commands (see the applicable XTP Power SIS commands on page 106)
• Built-in HTML pages (see XTP Power Page, on page 141)
• The XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System Configuration
Software help file, available at www.extron.com)
1
XTP output connectors — Connect an STP cable between this connector and
a compatible Extron XTP receiver (see TP connectors on page 19 to wire the
connector).
2
XTP Power indicators — Lights to indicate that the output board is providing
power over XTP (PoX) to the receiver connected to this RJ-45 connector.
3
LAN (Ethernet) connectors — As desired, connect a TP cable between a
host device or control LAN and this connector for passive extension to the LAN
(Ethernet) connector on the connected endpoint (see TP connectors on
page 19 to wire the connector).
4
IR/RS-232 Over XTP Connectors — If desired, connect serial RS-232 signals,
modulated IR signals, or both to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors
for bidirectional RS-232 and IR communications on the associated outputs (see
RS-232 and IR connectors on page 22 to wire the connectors).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
17
XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K (fiber optic output board)
OUTPUTS
XTP OUT
XTP OUT
XTP OUT
XTP OUT
LAN
SIG
1
2
Figure 12.
1
LINK
LAN
SIG
1
LINK
2
LAN
1
SIG
LINK
2
LAN
SIG
1
XTP CP 4o FIBER 4K
OVER FIBER
RS-232
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
2
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
3
Fiber Optic Output Board Connectors and Indicators
XTP Out connectors — Connect a fiber optic cable between the Rx connector
on a compatible Extron fiber optic receiver and this connector. This board uses
SFP modules with industry-standard LC fiber optics connectors to provide reliable
physical connectivity and precise fiber core alignment.
Signal LED — Indicates that a cable is connected to a fiber optic receiver.
Link LED — Indicates that a valid fiber optic signal is detected.
2
LAN (Ethernet) connectors — As desired, connect a TP cable between a
host device or control LAN and this connector for passive extension to the LAN
(Ethernet) connector on the connected endpoint (see TP connectors on
page 19 to wire the connector).
3
IR/RS-232 Over Fiber Connectors — If desired, connect serial RS-232 signals,
modulated IR signals, or both to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors
for bidirectional RS-232 and IR communications on the associated inputs (see
RS-232 and IR connectors on page 22 to wire the connectors).
XTP II CP 4o 4K PLUS and XTP CP 4o HDMI (HDMI Output board)
OUTPUTS
XTP II CP 4o HD 4K PLUS
AUDIO
L
6
Figure 13.
6
6
R
L
R
6
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
7
4K HDMI Output Board Connectors
XTP CP 4o HDMI
AUDIO
L
1
Figure 14.
1
1
1
R
L
R
OUT
OUT
2
HDMI Output Board Connectors
1
Output connector — Connect an HDMI cable between this port and an HDMI
video display (see HDMI connectors on page 22 for pin assignments and to
use the LockIt HDMI Cable Lacing Bracket to secure the connector to the
transmitter).
2
Audio Outputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect audio
devices such as an audio amplifier or powered speakers, to these
3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors. These connectors output
unamplified, level audio, whether it is tied from an analog input or de-embedded
from a digital input (see Analog audio output connectors on page 25 to wire
the connectors).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
18
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro (DVI Pro Output board)
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro
AUDIO
L
1
Figure 15.
1
1
R
L
R
1
L
R
L
OUT
OUT
R
2
DVI Pro Output Board Connectors
NOTE: Although the DVI Pro boards use DVI-I connectors, the matrix switchers
handle only DVI-D (digital) video.
1
Output connector — Connect a DVI cable between this port and an DVI video
display (see DVI connectors on page 23 for pin assignments).
2
Audio Outputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect audio devices
such as an audio amplifier or powered speakers, to these 3.5 mm,
5-pole captive screw connectors. These connectors output unamplified,
level audio, whether it is tied from an analog input or de-embedded from a
digital input (see Analog audio output connectors on page 25 to wire the
connectors).
XTP CP 4o SA (Analog Audio Output board)
XTP CP 4o SA
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
OUT
OUT
1
Figure 16.
1
Analog Audio Board Connectors
Audio Outputs (analog audio) connectors — Connect audio
devices such as an audio amplifier or powered speakers, to these
3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw connectors. These connectors output
unamplified, level audio, whether it is tied from an analog input or de-embedded
from a digital input (see Analog audio output connectors on page 25 to wire
the connectors).
Input and output pin assignments and wiring
TP connectors
It is essential that your cables (on the XTP and LAN [Ethernet] connectors) be the correct
type and that they be properly terminated with the correct pinout. These links use
unshielded twisted pair (UTP) or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables, terminated with RJ-45
connectors. XTP and LAN cables are limited to a length of 330 feet (100 m).
NOTES:
• Do not use standard telephone cables. Telephone cables do not support Ethernet
or Fast Ethernet.
• Do not stretch or bend cables. Transmission errors can occur.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
19
The cable used depends on your network speed. The matrix switcher LAN port supports
both 10 Mbps (10Base-T — Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (100Base-T — Fast Ethernet),
half-duplex and full-duplex Ethernet connections. Input and output boards support
100Base-T only.
•
10Base-T Ethernet requires CAT 3 UTP or STP cable at minimum.
•
100Base-T Fast Ethernet requires CAT 5e UTP or STP cable at minimum.
The TP cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and must
be properly terminated for your application.
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the XTP CrossPoint
matrix switcher.
•
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the XTP CrossPoint matrix switcher to an
Ethernet LAN and connection to the input and output board XTP connectors.
Pins:
12345678
Straight-through Cable
Crossover Cable
(for connection to a switch, hub, or router)
End 1
Pin Wire Color
Side View
Insert Twisted
Pair Wires
RJ-45 Connector
Figure 17.
(for direct connection to a PC)
End 2
Pin Wire Color
End 1
Pin Wire Color
End 2
Pin Wire Color
1
white-orange
1
white-orange
1
white-orange
1
white-green
2
orange
2
orange
2
orange
2
green
3
white-green
3
white-green
3
white-green
3
white-orange
4
blue
4
blue
4
blue
4
blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
6
green
6
green
6
green
6
orange
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
8
brown
8
brown
8
brown
8
brown
RJ-45 Connector and Pinout Tables
Matrix switcher and XTP board LAN ports —
The LAN ports require CAT 3, CAT 5e, or CAT 6a, crossover or patch cables.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
20
XTP board XTP ports —
The XTP input boards and output boards are compatible with shielded twisted pair (F/UTP,
SF/UTP, and S/FTP) and unshielded twisted pair (U/UTP) cables.
ATTENTION:
• Do not connect these boards to a computer data or telecommunications network.
• Veuillez ne pas connecter ces cartes (appareils) (port) à un réseau de données
informatiques ou à un réseau de télécommunications.
• Do not use Extron UTP23SF-4 Enhanced Skew-Free AV UTP cable or STP201
cable to link the XTP products.
• N’utilisez pas le câble AV Skew-Free UTP version améliorée UTP23SF d’Extron ou
le câble STP201 pour relier les produits XTP.
• To ensure FCC Class A and CE compliance, STP cables and STP connectors are
required.
• Afin de s’assurer de la compatibilité entre FCC Classe A et CE, les câbles STP et
les connecteurs STP sont nécessaires.
Extron recommends using the following practices to achieve full transmission distances up
to 330 feet (100 m) and reduce transmission errors.
Use the following Extron XTP DTP 24 SF/UTP cables and connectors for the best
performance:
•
•
XTP DTP 24/1000
Non-Plenum 1000' (305 m) spool
22-236-03
•
XTP DTP 24P/1000
Plenum 1000' (305 m) spool
22-235-03
•
XTP DTP 24 Plug
Package of 10
101-005-02
•
If not using XTP DTP 24 cables, at a minimum, Extron recommends 24 AWG, solid
conductor, STP cable with a minimum bandwidth of 400 MHz.
•
Terminate cables with shielded connectors to the TIA/EIA-T568B standard only (patch
cables, see figure 17 on the previous page).
•
Limit the use of more than two pass-through points, which may include patch points,
punch down connectors, couplers, and power injectors. If these pass-through points
are required, use shielded couplers and punch down connectors.
NOTE: When using cable in bundles or conduits, consider the following:
• Do not exceed 40% fill capacity in conduits.
• Do not comb the cable for the first 20 m, where cables are straightened, aligned,
and secured in tight bundles.
• Loosely place cables and limit the use of tie wraps or hook and loop fasteners.
• Separate twisted pair cables from AC power cables.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
21
RS-232 and IR connectors
Figure 18 shows how to wire the RS-232 and IR connector.
IR Device
Rx Tx Gnd
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
G
IR
RS-232
Tx/Rx
Pins
Tx Rx Gnd
RS-232 Device
Figure 18.
RS-232 and IR Connector Wiring
NOTES:
• The length of exposed wires is critical. The ideal length is 3/16 inch (5 mm).
• If the stripped section of wire is longer than 3/16 inch, the exposed wires may
touch, causing a short circuit.
• If the stripped section of wire is shorter than 3/16 inch, wires can be easily pulled
out even if tightly fastened by the captive screws.
• Do not tin the power supply leads before installing them in the connector. Tinned
wires are not as secure in the connector and could be pulled out.
HDMI connectors
Figure 19 defines the pin arrangement for the HDMI connector.
19
18
1
1
HDMI
19
2
2
Type A Receptacle
HDMI
18
Type A Plug
Figure 19.
HDMI Connector
Use the LockIt Lacing Brackets, supplied with the input or output board, to securely fasten
HDMI cables to devices as follows:
1. Plug the HDMI cable into the panel connection (see figure 18, 1).
3
4
3
2
1
Figure 20.
5
Installing the LockIt Lacing Bracket
2. Loosen the HDMI connection mounting screw from the panel enough to allow the
LockIt lacing bracket to be placed over it (2). The screw does not have to be removed.
3. Place the LockIt lacing bracket on the screw and against the HDMI connector, then
tighten the screw to secure the bracket (3).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
22
ATTENTION:
• Do not overtighten the HDMI connector mounting screw. The shield it fastens
to is very thin and can easily be stripped.
• Ne serrez pas trop la vis de montage du connecteur HDMI. Le blindage auquel
elle est attachée est très fin et peut facilement être dénudé.
4. Loosely place the included tie wrap around the HDMI connector and the LockIt lacing
bracket as shown (4).
5. While holding the connector securely against the lacing bracket, use pliers or similar
tools to tighten the tie wrap, then remove any excess length (5).
DVI connectors
Figure 21 defines the pin arrangement for the DVI connector.
1
8
C1
C2
17
24
C3
C4
9
C5
Female Connector
Figure 21.
Male Connector (cable)
DVI Connectors
Analog video connectors
The 15-pin HD (VGA) universal analog input ports accept RGB (RGBHV, RGBs, RGsB), HDTV,
component video (bi- or tri-level sync), S-video, or composite video signals, and support
EDID emulation. Figure 22 shows the pinouts for each format type on the connector.
5
1
15
11
Figure 22.
VGA Connectors
15-Pin HD Connector Pinout Table
Pin
RGBHV
RGBs
RGsB
Component
S-video
Composite
1
Red
Red
Red
R-Y
2
Green
Green
Green/Sync
3
Blue
Blue
Blue
Y
Luma
Video
B-Y
Chroma
6
Red return
Red return
Red return
R-Y return
7
Green return
8
Blue return
Blue return
Blue return
Ground
Ground
Ground
12
EDID/DDC
EDID/DDC
EDID/DDC
13
H sync
C sync
14
V sync
15
EDID/DDC
return
4
5
Green return Green return
Y return
Luma return
B-Y return
C return
Video return
9
10
11
EDID/DDC
return
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
23
Analog audio input connectors
Connectors are included with the matrix switcher, but you must supply the audio cable. See
figure 23 to wire a connector for the appropriate input type. Use the supplied tie-wrap to
strap the audio cable to the extended tail of the connector. High impedance is generally over
800 ohms.
R
Figure 23.
R
Do not tin the wires!
Tip
Ring
Sleeves
Tip
Ring
L
L
Tip
Sleeve
Tip
Sleeve
Balanced Stereo Input
Unbalanced Stereo Input
Captive Screw Connector Wiring for Audio Inputs
NOTE: The length of exposed wires is important. The ideal length is 3/16 inch (5 mm)
(see the NOTES on page 22 for details).
A mono audio connector consists of a tip and sleeve. A stereo audio connector consists of
a tip, ring and sleeve. See figure 24 to identify the tip, ring, and sleeve parts of the connector
when you are making connections for the matrix switcher from existing audio cables. The
ring, tip, and sleeve wires are also shown on the captive screw audio connector diagrams,
figure 23, above, and figure 25 on the next page.
Tip (+)
Ring (-)
Tip (+)
Sleeve ( )
Sleeve ( )
RCA Connector
Figure 24.
3.5 mm Stereo Plug Connector
(balanced)
Typical Audio Connectors
The level for each analog audio input can be individually set via the front panel or remote
control to ensure that the level on the output does not vary from input to input (see Viewing
and Adjusting the Input Audio Level on page 48). You can also use an SIS command
(see page 93), the XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System Configuration
help file, or the HTML pages (see Changing the input gain and attenuation on
page 137).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
24
Analog audio output connectors
Connect audio devices, such as an audio amplifier or powered speakers, to these 3.5 mm,
5-pole captive screw connectors. These connectors output the tied unamplified, line level
audio. See figure 25 to wire an output connector. Use the supplied tie-wrap to strap the
audio cable to the extended tail of the connector.
NO GROUND HERE
L
Tip
Ring
R
Figure 25.
Tip
Ring
R
NO GROUND HERE
Unbalanced Stereo Output
L
Do not tin the wires!
Tip
Sleeves
Tip
Balanced Stereo Output
Captive Screw Connector Wiring for Audio Outputs
ATTENTION:
• For unbalanced audio, connect the sleeves to the ground contact. DO NOT
connect the sleeves to the negative (-) contacts.
• Pour l’audio asymétrique, connectez les manchons au contact au sol. Ne PAS
connecter les manchons aux contacts négatifs (–).
• The length of exposed wires is important. The ideal length is 3/16 inch (5 mm) (see
the NOTES on page 22 for details).
• La longueur des câbles exposés est importante lorsque l’on entreprend de les
dénuder. La longueur idéale est de 5 mm (3/16 inches) (voir les NOTES à la
page 22 pour plus d’informations).
NOTE: The audio that is output on these connectors is converted from the tied
embedded input signal or the analog audio input. This feature allows you to duplicate
the outputs while eliminating the need for extra receivers.
The volume level for each analog output can be individually set via the front panel or remote
control (see Viewing and Adjusting the Analog Output Volume on page 54). You can
also use an SIS command (see page 104), the XTP System Configuration software (see
the XTP System Configuration Software Help File, available at www.extron.com), or the
HTML pages (see Changing the output volume level on page 138).
By default, the audio ties follow the video ties. Audio breakaway, which can be activated
via the front panel or under remote control, allows you to select from any one of the
audio input sources and route it separately from its corresponding video source (see
Example 3: Remove a tie from a set of ties on page 40). You can also use an
SIS command (see page 87), the XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP
System Configuration Software help file, available at www.extron.com), or the HTML
pages (see Set and View Ties Page on page 135).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
25
Remote Control Ports
C
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port (see figure 2 on page 12 and figure 3 on
page 13) — Connect a host device, such as a computer or touchpanel control, to
the matrix switcher via this 9-pin D connector for serial RS-232 or RS-422 control (see
figure 26).
Remote RS-232 and RS-422 Pinout Table
Pin
RS-232
RS-232
1
2
Tx
Tx-
3
Rx
Rx-
Gnd
Gnd
9
4
5
5
1
6
7
Rx+
8
Tx+
6
9
Figure 26.
Remote RS-232/RS-422 Port
See Programming Guide on page 76, for definitions of the SIS commands (serial
commands to control the matrix switcher and connected endpoints via this connector).
NOTE: The matrix switcher can support either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial
communication protocol, and can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200
baud rates.
See Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate on
page 61 to configure the RS-232/RS-422 port from the front panel.
If desired, connect an MKP 2000 or MKP 3000 remote control panel to the rear panel
Remote port on the matrix switcher. See to the MKP 2000 Remote Control Panel User
Guide or the MKP 3000 User Guide for details.
Ethernet Connection
D
ACT
LAN port (see figure 2 and figure 3) — If desired, for IP control of the
LAN
system, connect the matrix switcher to a PC or to an Ethernet LAN via
LINK
this RJ-45 connector. You can use a PC to control the networked matrix
switcher with SIS commands from anywhere in the world. You can also control the
matrix switcher from a PC that is running the Extron XTP Configuration Software or has
downloaded HTML pages from the matrix switcher (see TP connectors on page 19
to wire the connector).
Act LED indicator — Indicates transmission of data packets on the RJ-45 connector.
This LED should blink quickly as the matrix switcher communicates.
Link LED indicator — Indicates that the matrix switcher is properly connected to an
Ethernet LAN. This LED should light steadily.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
26
Reset Button and LED
E
Reset button (see figure 2 on page 12 and figure 3 on page 13) — The
Reset button initiates four levels of matrix switcher reset. For resets, press and
hold the button while the matrix switcher is running or while you power up the
matrix switcher (see Rear Panel Operations on page 62 for details).
F
AC power connector —
RESET
Power
NOTE: See figure 2 on page 12 and figure 3 on page 13.
Plug a standard IEC power cord into this connector to connect the matrix switcher to a
100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz power source.
Front Panel Configuration Port and Power LEDs
CONTROL
CONFIG
ENTER
PRESET
1
I/O
ESC
VIEW
VIDEO
CONTROL
AUDIO
CONFIG
1
3
REDUNDANT
2
4
2
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
XTP CROSSPOINT 3200
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
A
I/O
VIEW
POWER
XTP SERIES DIGITAL MATRIX SWITCHER
XTP SERIES DIGITAL MATRIX SWITCHER
BXTP CrossPoint 1600
Figure 27.
PRESET
PRIMARY
POWER
A
ENTER
A
B XTP CrossPoint 3200
Front Panel Configuration (Config) Port and Power LEDs
Configuration port — This USB mini-B port serves a similar communications function
as the rear panel Remote port, but it is easier to access than the rear port after the
matrix switcher has been installed and cabled.
NOTE: A front panel Configuration port connection and a rear panel Remote port
connection can both be active at the same time. If commands are sent to both
simultaneously, the command that reaches the processor first is handled first.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
27
B
Power LEDs —
NOTES:
• The XTP CrossPoint 3200 has four power supplies installed. These power
supplies are indicated by the following LEDs:
• LEDs 1 and 2 — Indicate the status of the two primary 12 V supplies.
• LED 3 — Indicates the status of the redundant 12 V supply.
• LED 4 — Indicates the status of the 48 V power supply, which provides PoX.
• The XTP CrossPoint 1600 has two power supplies, which provide 12 V and
48 V in its standard configuration, with two optional, redundant second power
supplies available. These power supplies are indicated by the following LEDs:
• Primary LED 1 — Indicates the status from the standard primary 12 V
supply.
• Redundant LED 1 — Indicates the status of 12 V from the optional
redundant supply.
• Primary LED 2 — Indicates the status from the standard primary 48 V
supply, which provides PoX.
• Redundant LED 2 — Indicates the status of 48 V from the optional
redundant supply.
Green — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating within normal
tolerances.
Red — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating outside the normal
tolerances or has failed.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Installation
28
Operation
This section describes the front panel operation of the XTP CrossPoint Matrix Switcher,
including:
•
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
•
Front Panel Operations
•
Rear Panel Operations
•
Optimizing the Analog Audio
•
RS-232 Insertion
•
Troubleshooting
•
Configuration Worksheets
Front Panel Controls and Indicators
The front panel controls (see figure 28 and figure 29 on the next page) are grouped into two
sets. The input and output buttons, A and B, are grouped on the left side of the control
panel. The control buttons and video/audio (I/O) selection buttons, C through H, are
grouped on the right side of the panel.
A
CD E F G H
INPUTS
1
2 3 4 5
1
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUTPUTS
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CONTROL
ENTER
PRESET
VIEW
CONFIG
I/O
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
PRIMARY
1
2
REDUNDANT
POWER
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
XTP SERIES DIGITAL MATRIX SWITCHER
B
Figure 28.
A
B
C
D
E
I
Front Panel, XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher
Input buttons (see page 31)
Output buttons (see page 31)
Enter button (see page 32)
Preset button (see page 32)
F
G
H
I
Esc button (see page 33)
Video button (see page 34)
Audio button (see page 34)
Power LEDs (see page 34)
View button (see page 33)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
29
A
CD EF G H
INPUTS
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
2 3 4 5
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
CONTROL
ENTER
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
OUTPUTS
CONFIG
PRESET
1
3
2
4
VIEW
I/O
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
POWER
XTP
CrossPoint 3200
XTP SERIES DIGITAL MATRIX SWITCHER
B
Figure 29.
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
I
Front Panel, XTP CrossPoint 3200
Input buttons (see page 31)
Output buttons (see page 31)
Enter button (see page 32)
Preset button (see page 32)
View button (see page 33)
Esc button (see page 33)
Video button (see page 34)
Audio button (see page 34)
Power LEDs (see page 34)
The illuminated buttons can be labeled with text, graphics, or both. The buttons can be set
to provide amber background illumination all the time, or the background illumination can be
turned off (see Background Illumination on page 61). The buttons blink or are lit at full
intensity (depending on the operation) when selected.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
30
Input and Output Buttons
NOTES:
• Input and output buttons cannot select an input or output number that is higher
than your matrix size or if the board that supports it is not installed. Unselectable
buttons do have other functions as described in the following pages.
• See Front Panel Operations, beginning on page 35, for detailed descriptions of
the following operations.
Primary functions
Action
Select input or output for tie being created.
Indication Color: LED appearance:
Amber: video and audio tie
Green: video only tie
Red: audio only tie
1
Blink: potential tie/untie.
Lit: current tie
2
3
through
16
or
32
Secondary functions
Presets
Action
Select a preset in Preset mode.
Indication
Input audio
level
Lit: A preset has already been saved to this location.
Blink: Preset location is selected to be saved.
Input buttons: Select the input for audio gain or attenuation adjustment.
Action
Indication
Input buttons lit: Input audio selected for adjustment.
Indication
Output buttons lit or blinking: Indicate the input gain or attenuation level.
Output
audio
volume
Action
Output buttons: Select the output for audio volume adjustment.
Indication
Output buttons lit: Output audio is selected for adjustment.
Indication
Input buttons lit or blinking: Indicated the output volume level.
Output
mutes
Action
Output buttons: Press and hold to mute or unmute the output.
Background
illumination
Action
Output buttons blinking: Output is muted.
Indication
Input 1 and Input 2 buttons:
Toggle between background
illumination or buttons unlit.
A
Input buttons (see figure 28 on page 29 or figure 29 on page 30) — The input
buttons have one primary () and three secondary functions (•):
Select and identify an input for creating ties or for audio level adjustment.
B
•
Select a preset.
•
Display the output volume level.
•
(Input 1 and Input 2 only) Toggle background illumination of the buttons on and off.
Output buttons (see figure 28 or figure 29) — The output buttons have one primary
() and three secondary functions (•):
Select and identify an output for ties or for volume adjustment.
•
Select a preset.
•
Mute the output.
•
Display the audio level of the selected input.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
31
Control Buttons
NOTE: See Front Panel Operations, beginning on page 35, for detailed
descriptions of the following operations.
Primary functions
Action
Save changes
Indication Blink: Save needed
ENTER
Select Preset mode
Select View mode
Cancel or Escape
Blink: Save preset
Lit: Recall preset
View mode
selected
Blinks once
PRESET
ESC
VIEW
Secondary functions
Port
configuration
Action 1
Select Configuration mode.
Action 2
Select 9600 baud
Indication Blink: 9600 baud
Front panel
locks
Audio
Select 19200 baud
Select 38400 baud
Select 115200
baud
Blink: 19200 baud
Blink: 38400 baud
Blink: 115200 baud
Action 1
Select Lock mode 1 or toggle between
mode 2 and mode 1.
Action 2
Select Lock mode 2 or toggle between mode 0 and mode 2.
Action
In Audio mode,
decrease input
level or output
volume.
C
In Audio mode,
increase input
level or output
volume.
Enter button (see figure 28 on page 29 or figure 29 on page 30) — Enter has
two primary () and two secondary functions (•):
Saves configuration or preset changes that you make on the front panel. To create a
simple configuration:
•
Specify video, audio, or both (see I/O buttons [G] and [H]).
•
Press the desired input button (A).
•
Press the desired output button or buttons (B).
•
Press the Enter button.
Indicates that a potential tie has been created but not saved.
D
•
With the Preset, View, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port Configuration mode.
•
Selects 9600 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port Configuration mode
and indicates the selection.
Preset button (see figure 28 or figure 29) — Preset has two primary () and three
secondary functions (•):
Activates Save Preset mode to save a configuration as a preset and Recall Preset
mode to activate a previously-defined preset.
Blinks when Save Preset mode is active and lights steadily when Recall Preset mode
is active.
•
With the Enter, View, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port Configuration mode.
•
Selects 19200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port Configuration mode
and indicates the selection.
•
With the View and Esc buttons, selects front panel security Lock mode 2 or toggles
between mode 0 (unlocked) and mode 2.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
32
E
View (<) button (see figure 28 on page 29 or figure 29 on page 30) — The View
(<) button has one primary function () and six secondary functions (•):
Select and indicate View-only mode, which displays the current configuration.
NOTE: View-only mode also provides a way to mute and unmute the outputs.
F
•
Decreases the audio level of the selected analog input.
•
Decreases the volume of the selected analog output.
•
With the Enter, Preset, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port Configuration mode.
•
Selects 38400 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port Configuration
mode, and indicates the selection.
•
With the Preset button and Esc button, selects between front panel locks (Lock
mode 2 and Lock mode 0).
•
With the Esc button, selects between front panel locks (Lock mode 2 and Lock
mode 1).
Esc (>) button (see figure 28 or figure 29) — The Esc (>) button has two primary
functions () and six secondary functions (•):
Cancels operations or selections in progress and resets the front panel button
indicators.
Blinks once to indicate that the escape function has been activated.
•
Increases the audio level of the selected analog input.
•
Increases the volume of the selected analog output.
•
With the Enter, Preset, and View buttons, selects Serial Port Configuration mode.
•
Selects 115200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port Configuration
mode and indicates the selection.
•
With the Preset button and View button, selects between front panel locks (Lock
mode 2 and Lock mode 0).
•
With the View button, selects between front panel locks (Lock mode 2 and Lock
mode 1).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
33
I/O Controls
NOTE: See Front Panel Operations, beginning on page 35, for detailed
descriptions of the following operations.
Primary functions
Action
Select video
Indication Green: selected
Select audio
Red: selected
VIDEO
AUDIO
Secondary functions
Resets
Action 1:
Perform a system reset.
Port
Configuration
Action
Select RS-232.
Indication Blink: selected
Blink: selected
Audio
Action
Select Audio mode.
G
Select RS-422
Video button (see figure 28 on page 29 or figure 29 on page 30) — Video has
one primary () and two secondary functions (•):
Selects and deselects video for a configuration that is being created or viewed and
lights green to indicate that video is available for configuring or for viewing.
H
•
With the Audio button, commands the front panel system reset.
•
Selects the RS-232 protocol for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode and indicates the selection.
Audio button (see figure 28 or figure 29) — Audio has one primary () and three
secondary functions (•):
Selects and deselects audio for a configuration that is being created or viewed and
lights to indicate that audio is available for configuration or viewing.
•
Selects the Audio mode, in which you can adjust the analog input audio level and
the analog output audio volume.
•
With the Video button, commands the front panel system reset.
•
Selects the RS-422 protocol for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port
Configuration mode and indicates the selection.
Power LEDs
I
Primary and Redundant Power Supply LEDs —
NOTE: See Power LEDs on page 28 to identify the power supplies indicated by
the LEDs.
Green — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating within normal
tolerances.
Red — Indicates that the associated power supply is operating outside the normal
tolerances or has failed.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
34
Button Icons
The numbered translucent covers on the input and output buttons can be removed and
replaced to insert labels behind the covers.
Input and output labels can be created easily with the Extron Button-Label Generator
software, which is shipped with every Extron matrix switcher. Each input and output can be
labeled with names, alphanumeric characters, or color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input
and output selection (see figure 30). See the Removing and Installing Button Labels on
page 146 for details on using the labeling software, blank labels you can fill in yourself, and
a procedure for removing and replacing the translucent covers.
INPUTS
8
9 10
8
9
Figure 30.
DVD
VCR
Document
Camera
Computer
13
Computer
15
VTG 200
28 29 30 31 32
Sample Button Icons
Front Panel Operations
See figure 28 on page 29 or figure 29 on page 30 for front panel views.
The following sections detail the power-up process and then provide sample procedures for
the following actions:
•
Creating ties, sets of ties, and configurations (see page 38)
•
Changing a configuration (see page 39)
•
Viewing ties, sets of ties, and configurations (see page 41)
•
Saving a preset (see page 44)
•
Recalling a preset (see page 45)
•
Muting and unmuting outputs (see page 46)
•
Viewing and adjusting the analog input audio level (see page 48)
•
Viewing and adjusting the analog output volume (see page 54)
•
Locking and unlocking the front panel (see page 59)
•
Performing front panel resets (see page 60)
•
Toggling background illumination on and off (see page 61)
•
Reading and setting the Remote port settings (see page 61)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
35
Definitions
The following Extron matrix switcher terms are used throughout this guide:
Tie — An input-to-output connection
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs.
NOTE: An output can never be tied to more than one input.
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the matrix switcher
(also called configuration 0)
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 32 global memory
presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to the input buttons and
(where necessary) output buttons. When a preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the
current configuration.
Power
Apply power by connecting the IEC power cord between the matrix
15
switcher and an AC source. The matrix switcher performs a self-test
that blinks the front panel button indicators red, green, and amber
15
and then turns them off. An error-free power-up self-test sequence
leaves all input, output, and control buttons either unlit or showing
background illumination and the Video button and the Audio button lit.
16
CONTROL
16
ENTER
PRESET
VIEW
I/O
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
The current configuration and all presets are saved in non-volatile memory. When power is
applied, the most recent configuration is retrieved. The previous presets remain intact.
If an error occurs during the self-test, the matrix switcher locks up and does not operate. If
your matrix switcher locks up on power-up, call the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support
Hotline. See www.extron.com for the phone number in your region of the world.
Front Panel Security Lockouts
In the procedural descriptions that follow, it is assumed that the matrix switcher is in Lock
mode 0 (fully unlocked). The following two Lock modes are also available:
•
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for setting Lock
mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.
•
Lock mode 2 — Advanced features are locked and can be viewed only. Basic
functions are unlocked.
NOTE: The matrix switcher is shipped from the factory in Lock mode 2. See Setting
the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59 for a detailed list of basic
and advanced functions and the procedure to set the various front panel locks.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
36
Creating a Configuration
The current configuration can be changed using the front panel buttons. Change the current
configuration as follows:
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indicators, output button indicators, or
control button indicators that may be lit.
2. Press the Video button and Audio button as necessary to select video, audio, or both
for configuration.
3. Press the input and output buttons to select the desired input and one or more outputs.
•
Input buttons and output buttons light or blink:
•
Amber to indicate video and audio ties
•
Green to indicate video only ties
•
Red to indicate audio only ties
•
To indicate potential ties, output buttons blink the appropriate color when an input
is selected.
•
To indicate current ties, output buttons light steadily the appropriate color when an
input is selected.
•
To clear unwanted outputs, press and release the associated lit output buttons. To
indicate potential unties, output buttons blink the appropriate color when an output
is deselected but not untied from the input.
4. Press and release the Enter button to accept the tie or to break an existing tie.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to create or clear additional ties until the desired configuration
is complete.
NOTES:
• Only one video input and one audio input can be tied to an output.
• If a tie is made between an input and an output, and the selected output was
previously tied to another input, the older tie is broken in favor of the newer tie.
• If an input with no tie is selected, only the button for the selected input lights.
• When the Video button and the Audio button are lit, if an input with an audio
tie but no video tie is selected, the button for the input and the button for the
output light the appropriate color (amber, green, or red).
• As each input and output is selected, the associated output button blinks
the appropriate color to indicate a tentative tie. Buttons for outputs that were
already tied to the input light the appropriate color steadily. Outputs that are
already tied can be left on, along with new blinking selections, or toggled off by
pressing the associated output button.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
37
Example 1: Create a set of video and audio ties
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The button flashes once.
2. Select video and audio for the tie: If necessary, press and release Video and Audio
to light both.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button lights green when selected. The button lights red when selected.
3. Select an input: Press and release Input 5.
Press the button.
The button lights amber.
INPUTS
1
2
3
5
4
6
7
8 15 16
4. Select the outputs: Press and release Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8.
Press the buttons.
The buttons blink amber to indicate that the selected video and audio inputs
will be tied to these outputs.
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C O NT R O L
8 15 16
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
NOTE: You can cancel the entire set of ties at this point by pressing and releasing
the Esc button. The Esc button blinks once.
5. Confirm the change: Press and release Enter.
Press the Enter button to confirm
the configuration change.
ENTER
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
38
The current configuration (see figure 31) is now input 5 video and audio are tied to output 3,
output 4, and output 8.
Input 5 (video and audio)
tied to outputs 3, 4, and 8
Input
5
3
4
Output
Video
Audio
8
Figure 31.
Final Configuration, Example 1
Example 2: Add a video tie to a set of video and audio ties
In the following example, a new video tie is added to the current configuration. The example
shows the front panel indications that result from your actions.
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1 on page 38.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
2. Select video only for the tie: Press and release Video and Audio as necessary to
light Video only.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button lights green when selected. The button is unlit or background illuminated when deselected.
3. Select an input: Press and release Input 5.
Press the button.
The button lights green to indicate that video
outputs can be tied to or untied from this input.
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light
green to indicate the video ties created in example 1.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OUTPUTS
1
8
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
4. Select the output: Press and release Output 1.
Press the button.
The button blinks green to indicate that only the selected video
input will be tied to this output.
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
C O NT R O L
8 15 16
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
5. Confirm the change: Press and release Enter.
Press the Enter button to confirm
the configuration change.
ENTER
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
39
The current configuration (see figure 32) is now:
•
Video — Input 5 video is tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8.
•
Audio — Input 5 audio is tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8.
Input 5 video tied
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8
Input 5 audio tied
to outputs 3, 4, and 8
Input
5
1
3
4
Output
Video
Audio
8
Figure 32.
Final Configuration, Example 2
Example 3: Remove a tie from a set of ties
In the following example, an existing tie is removed from the current configuration. The
example shows the front panel indications that result from your actions.
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1 on page 38 and
example 2 on page 39.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
2. Select audio only for the tie: Press and release Video and Audio as necessary to
light Audio only.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.
The button is unlit or background illuminated The button lights red when selected.
when deselected.
3. Select an input: Press and release Input 5.
Press the button.
The button lights red.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light
red to indicate the audio ties created in example 1.
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The Output 1 button does not light to indicate the tie
created in example 2 because that tie is video only.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
40
4. Select the output: Press and release Output 4.
C O NT R O L
Press the button.
The button blinks red to indicate the pending change:
audio input will be untied.
ENTER PRESET
OUTPUTS
2
1
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks
green to indicate the need to
confirm the change.
5. Confirm the change: Press and release Enter.
Press the Enter button to confirm
the configuration change.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
ENTER
The Enter button returns to
unlit or background illumination.
The current configuration (see figure 33) is now:
•
Video — Input 5 video is tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8.
•
Audio — Input 5 audio is tied to output 3 and output 8.
Input 5 video tied
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8
Input 5 audio tied
to outputs 3 and 8
Input
5
1
3
4
Output
8
Figure 33.
Video
Audio
Final Configuration, Example 3
Viewing the Configuration
The current configuration can be viewed using the front panel buttons. The View-only mode
prevents inadvertent changes to the current configuration. View-only mode also provides a
way to mute audio outputs (see Muting and Unmuting Audio Outputs on page 46).
View the current configuration as follows:
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button indications, or
control button indications that may be on.
2. Press and release the View button. All of the buttons light for outputs that are not tied
as follows:
•
Amber: No tied video or audio input
•
Green: No tied video input
•
Red: No tied audio input
If you press an output button for which there are no ties, the output buttons light for all
outputs without ties.
3. Select video, audio, or both to view by pressing the Video button, Audio button, or
both.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
41
4. Select the desired input or outputs whose ties you wish to view by pressing the input
and output buttons.
NOTES:
• To see all ties of the current configuration, press and release each input and
output button, one at a time, with the Video button and the Audio button lit.
• When you view video and audio ties, the Video button is lit green and the
Audio button is lit red. After you select an input or output, the output buttons
light different colors to show where video and audio ties are not the same
(audio is broken away). Amber indicates video and audio, green indicates video
only, and red indicates audio only.
• After 30 seconds of front panel inactivity, View-only mode automatically
deselects.
Example 4: Viewing video and audio, audio only, and video only ties
In the following example, we view the video and audio, audio only, and video-only ties in the
current configuration. The steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1 on page 38,
example 2 on page 39, and example 3 on page 40.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
2. Select View-only mode: Press and release View. View lights red.
3. Select video and audio for viewing: Press and release Video and Audio as
necessary to light both.
Press the Video button
to toggle on and off.
The button lights green
when selected.
Press the Audio button
to toggle on and off.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
The button lights red
when selected.
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied
outputs light the appropriate color:
Amber if no inputs are tied
Green if no video inputs are tied (only audio is tied)
Red if no audio inputs are tied (only video is tied).
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
4. Select an input: Press and release Input 5.
Press the button. It lights amber.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5
light or blink the appropriate color:
Amber for audio and video ties (audio follow)
Green for video ties (audio breakaway)
Red for audio ties (audio breakaway)
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
42
NOTE: You can also view a set of ties by selecting a tied output. Demonstrate this
as follows:
• Note the number of a lit output button, and then press and release the output
button for an untied (unlit or background illumination) output.
• Observe that all of the untied outputs light.
• Then press the output button that you noted previously.
• Observe that the selected output button, the tied input button (input 5), and the
output buttons light for all of the outputs that are tied to the input.
5. Deselect video: Press and release Video.
Press the button.
The button is unlit or
background illuminated
when deselected.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
The Audio button
remains lit red to
indicate that only
audio is selected.
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5
light red to indicate audio ties (audio breakaway).
OUTPUTS
2
1
3
5
4
6
7
8 15 16
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
6. Toggle audio off and video on: Press and release Video and Audio.
Press button.
Press the button.
I/O
The button lights
green when selected.
VIDEO
The button is unlit
or background
illuminated when
deselected.
AUDIO
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5
light green to indicate video ties (audio breakaway).
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are
either unlit or background illuminated.
If video ties are established for input 5, the output buttons light green for all video
outputs tied to input 5. If no ties are established for input 5, all output buttons return to
either unlit or to background illumination.
7. Exit View-only mode: Press and release View.
Press the button.
VIEW
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
The View button returns to unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
43
Using Presets
The current configuration (configuration 0) can be saved as a preset in any one of 32 preset
memory locations. All 32 presets are assigned to the input buttons and (where necessary)
output buttons and are available to be either saved or retrieved from the front panel. When a
preset is recalled from memory, it becomes the current configuration.
NOTES:
• Only the audio and video ties are stored and recalled; audio gain settings are not
saved, and they do not change when a preset is recalled.
• Presets cannot be viewed from the front panel unless they are recalled as the
current configuration.
• The current configuration and all presets are stored in non-volatile memory. When
power is removed and restored, the current configuration is still active and all
presets are retained.
• When a preset is recalled, it replaces the current configuration, which is lost
unless it is also stored as a preset. The recalled preset overwrites all of the current
configuration ties in favor of the preset configuration ties.
• All models have 32 presets; on the XTP CrossPoint 1600, preset numbers 17
through 32 are available using the output buttons. Figure 34 shows the presets
associated with the input and output buttons on the XTP CrossPoint 1600.
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
INPUTS
Input
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Output
buttons
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUTPUTS
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Figure 34.
XTP CrossPoint 1600 Preset Locations
Example 5: Saving a preset
In the following example, the current configuration is saved as a preset. The example shows
the front panel indications that result from your actions.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
2. Select Save Preset mode: Press and hold Preset for approximately 2 seconds until it
blinks.
Preset Assigned
Press and hold the Preset button until it blinks.
PRESET
PRESET
2 seconds
All input buttons with assigned
presets light red.
If you then save the configuration
to a lit preset number, the
configuration data at that preset
location will be overwritten.
1
2
3 14 15 16
No Preset Assigned
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
44
3. Select the preset: Press and release the input or output button for the desired preset.
C O NT R O L
Press the button.
ENTER PRESET
The button blinks to indicate that this
preset number is selected but not saved.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
VIEW
ESC
•
The Enter button blinks
to indicate the need to
save the preset.
•
The Preset button
continues to blink.
4. Save the Preset: Press and release Enter to save the preset. The current
configuration is now stored in the selected memory location.
Press the button.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
2
1
The Enter and Preset
buttons return to unlit or
background illumination.
3 14 15 16
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.
Example 6: Recalling a preset
In the following example, a preset is recalled to become the current configuration. The steps
show the front panel indications that result from your action.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release Esc.
2. Select Recall Preset mode: Press and release Preset.
Preset Assigned
Press and release the button.
The Preset button lights.
2
1
PRESET
All input buttons with assigned
presets light red.
3 14 15 16
No Preset Assigned
3. Select the preset: Press and release the input button or output button for the desired
preset.
C O NT R O L
Press the button.
ENTER PRESET
The button blinks to indicate that this
preset number is selected but not recalled.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
VIEW
ESC
The Enter button blinks to
indicate the need to recall
the preset.
4. Recall the preset: Press and release Enter. The configuration stored in the selected
memory location is now the current configuration and can be viewed in the View-only
mode (see example 4 on page 42).
Press the button.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
The Enter and Preset
buttons return to unlit or
background illumination.
1
2
3 14 15 16
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
45
Muting and Unmuting Video and Audio Outputs
Individual outputs can be muted or unmuted as follows:
NOTE: Output mutes are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You
can view the status of the output (muted or unmuted) in Lock mode 2 but you cannot
change it from the front panel (see Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive
Modes) on page 59).
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button indications, or
control button indications that may be on.
2. Press and release the View button.
3. Select video, audio, or both to mute or unmute by pressing the Video button and the
Audio button.
4. One at a time, press and hold the buttons for the desired outputs for approximately
2 seconds. The output buttons for the selected outputs blink to indicate the mute or
return to their previous state to indicate the unmute.
5. Press and release the View button to return to normal matrix switcher operation.
NOTES:
• You can mute video and audio, video-only, or audio-only outputs. Pressing and
releasing the Video button and the Audio button toggles each selection on
and off.
• When you enter View-only mode, the output buttons turn on for all outputs
without ties.
• Mutes are saved to non-volatile memory. When power is removed and restored,
the mute settings are retained.
Example 7: Muting and unmuting an output
In the following example, a matrix switcher output is muted and unmuted. The steps show
the front panel indications that result from your action.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.
2. Select View-only mode: Press and release the View button. The button lights red.
3. Select both video and audio for viewing and muting: If necessary, press and
release the Video button and the Audio button.
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1 on page 38,
example 2 on page 39, and example 3 on page 40.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
46
Press the Video button
to toggle on and off.
The button lights green
when selected.
Press the Audio button
to toggle on and off.
I/O
VIDEO
AUDIO
The button lights red
when selected.
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied outputs light
amber if no inputs are tied, green if no video inputs are tied
(only audio is tied), or red if no audio are tied (only video is tied).
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
NOTE: Output mutes are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You
can view the mutes in Lock mode 2 but you cannot change them from the front
panel (see Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59).
If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 4 and 5, the
actions are ignored.
4. Mute outputs: One at a time:
a. Press and hold the Output 3 button for approximately 2 seconds until the button
begins to blink.
b. Press and hold the Output 4 button for approximately 2 seconds until the button
begins to blink.
Mute outputs one at a time.
3
Press and hold the Output 3 button.
2 seconds
3
The button blinks to indicate
that the output is muted.
Green-Unlit = Video is muted.
Red-Unlit = Audio is muted.
Green-Amber = Video and audio are muted.
(Amber is visible only after you have
selected the Video and Audio buttons).
4
Press and hold the Output 4 button.
2 seconds
4
The button blinks to indicate
that the output is muted.
NOTES:
• If both video and audio are selected, the mute action toggles both the video
and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is already
muted, the unmuted output is muted and the muted output is unmuted.
• If both video and audio are selected and only video is muted, the output
button blinks between green and amber. If only audio is selected, the
output button blinks between red and amber.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
47
5. Mute outputs: One at a time:
a. Press and hold the Output 3 button for approximately 2 seconds until the button
returns to its previous state. The output 3 video and audio signals are unmuted.
b. Press and hold the Output 4 button for approximately 2 seconds until the button
returns to its previous state. The output 4 video and audio signals are unmuted.
Unmute outputs one at a time.
2 seconds
3
The button returns to its previous indication
(either lit, background illuminated, or unlit)
to indicate that the output is unmuted.
Press and hold the Output 4 button.
2 seconds
4
The button returns to its previous indication
(either lit, background illuminated, or unlit)
to indicate that the output is unmuted.
3
Press and hold the Output 3 button.
4
NOTE: If both video and audio are selected, the unmute action toggles both
the video and audio outputs. If either the video output or the audio output is
already unmuted, the muted output is unmuted and the unmuted output is
muted.
6. Exit View-only mode: Press and release the View button.
Press the button.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
VIEW
The View button returns to unlit or background illumination.
Viewing and Adjusting the Input Audio Level
The level of each analog audio input can be displayed and adjusted through a range of
-18 dB to +24 dB to ensure that there is no noticeable volume difference among sources
(see figure 35). The audio level can be adjusted from the front panel or under remote control.
The default audio level is 0 dB.
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
FULL HIGH DEFINITION 1080P VIDEO OUTPUT
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
TM
BLU-RAY DISC PLAYER
Blu-Ray Player
Local Audio
Inputs
Low Audio
Output Level
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
OUTPUTS
1
2 3 4 5
6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
No noticeable
volume differences
between sources
Output
Level
INPUTS
1
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
CONTROL
I/O
CONFIG
ENTER
PRIMARY
PRESET
1
VIEW
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
2
REDUNDANT
POWER
dBu
+24
+21
+19
+16
+13
+10
+7
+4
+1
-2
-5
-8
-12
-15
-18
VU
21
18
15
12
9
6
3
0
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-21
Audio System
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
XTP SERIES DIGITAL MATRIX SWITCHER
XTP CrossPoint 1600
Local Audio
Inputs
High Audio
Output Level
Figure 35.
CD Jukebox
Audio Gain and Attenuation
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
48
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control buttons that
may be lit.
2. Press and hold the Audio button until the button begins to blink red to enter Audio
mode. Release the button.
3. Press and release an input button to select an input that has analog audio. The output
buttons display the audio level for the selected input; the more output buttons lit, the
greater the gain or attenuation.
•
Green output buttons indicate a gain (+) audio level.
•
Red output buttons indicate an attenuation (–) level.
Audio gain and attenuation is displayed differently on different models.
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit steadily
(see the table on the next page).
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — Each output button indicates 1 dB when blinking and
2 dB when lit steadily (see the table on page 51).
4. Press and release the Esc (>) and View (<) buttons to increase and decrease the audio
level.
5. Press and release the Audio button to exit the Audio mode. The Audio button stops
blinking.
NOTES:
• Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.
• There is one level setting per analog audio input. The audio level setting is
shared by the left and right audio inputs.
• The audio level settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When power is
removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.
• Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O
configuration to video and audio selected for configuration (the Video and
Audio buttons lit).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
49
Output LED Indication
dB
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
24
10
9
8
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
23
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
22
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
19
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
2
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
14
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
8
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
4
7
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
6
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
6
5
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
4
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
2
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
1
1
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
11
Output LED Indication
dB
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
= unlit button
Green indicates a positive (gain) level.
= lit button
Red indicates a negative (attenuation) level.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
50
Output LED Indication
dB
24
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
18
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
12
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
10
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
= Unlit button
= Lit button
= Blinking button
Green indicates a positive (gain) level.
Red indicates a negative (attenuation) level.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
51
Example 8: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level
Because of the different gain and attenuation display schemes, the input audio levels that
result from the following example are shown two times:
•
As displayed on an XTP CrossPoint 3200 matrix switcher
•
As displayed on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 matrix switcher
The XTP CrossPoint 3200 drawings show the actions that led up to the display. The
XTP CrossPoint 1600 drawings show the gain or attenuation display only, not the actions
that caused it. The actions are the same for both models.
In the following example, an audio level is viewed and adjusted. The steps show the front
panel indications that result from your action.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.
2. Select Audio mode: Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds
until it blinks.
AUDIO
Press and hold.
AUDIO
2 seconds
3. Select an input with analog audio: Press and release the Input 5 button (see
figure 36).
Figure 36 and figure 37 show an audio gain level of +8 dB.
Press the button. It lights green.
INPUTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
The output buttons display the audio level and polarity (gain or attenuation)
of the selected input.
Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.
When the buttons are lit green, then indicate a gain (+) audio level.
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate an attenuation (-) level.
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
Figure 36.
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
Select an Input
Figure 37 shows the same +8 dB level as figure 36, but displayed on an
XTP CrossPoint 1600 matrix switcher.
OUTPUTS
1
2
Figure 37.
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
Level Display on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
52
4. Change the audio level: Press and release the View (<) button once (see figure 38) to
decrease the input audio level by 1 dB.
Press and release the View (<) button several more times (see figure 36) to decrease
the input audio level by 1 dB per button press. Note the output button indication
changes that occur each time the View (<) button is pressed.
Figure 38 and figure 39 show the result of pressing the View (<) button a total of nine
times, an audio attenuation level of -1 dB. Note that the level is now displayed in red to
indicate a negative level.
Press the button.
VIEW
OUTPUTS
2
1
3
4
Figure 38.
5
6
7
8 15 16
•
The output buttons display the audio level and
polarity (gain or attenuation) of the selected input.
•
Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a
gain (+) audio level.
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate
an attenuation (-) level.
Adjust the Analog Input Audio Level
Figure 39 shows the same –1 dB level as in figure 38, but displayed on an
XTP CrossPoint 1600 matrix switcher.
OUTPUTS
1
2
3
Figure 39.
4
5
6
7
8 15 16
Level Display on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher
5. Exit Audio mode: Press and release the Audio button.
Press the button.
I/O
The Video button
lights green.
VIDEO
AUDIO
The Audio button stops
blinking and lights.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
53
Viewing and Adjusting the Analog Output Volume
The level of each analog audio output can be displayed and adjusted through a range
of 100% (no attenuation) to 0% (maximum [76 dB] attenuation). The audio level can be
adjusted from the front panel or under serial port, USB port, or Ethernet control. The default
volume is 100% (no attenuation).
NOTE: Output volume is protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the volume in Lock mode 2 but you cannot adjust it from the front panel (see
Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59).
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control buttons that
may be lit.
2. Press and hold the Audio button until the button begins to blink red to enter Audio
mode. Release the button.
3. Press and release an output button to select an output that has analog audio. The input
buttons display the volume level for the selected output. As a general rule, the more
buttons that are lit, the higher the volume. The fewer buttons that are lit, the lower the
volume.
For a more detailed analysis of decoding the displayed value, see “Reading the
displayed volume” below.
4. Press and release the Esc (>) and View (<) buttons to increase or decrease the audio
volume.
5. Press and release the Audio button to save the audio settings and exit the Audio mode.
The Audio button stops blinking.
NOTES:
• Only the volume for the analog audio outputs is adjustable.
• There is one audio volume level setting per analog output. The audio level
setting is shared by the left and right audio inputs.
• The audio volume levels are stored in non-volatile memory. When power is
removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.
• Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O
buttons to Video lit green and Audio lit red.
• Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.
Reading the displayed volume
This section is a detailed look at reading the output volume display on the front panel. If you
do not need to read the exact value of the volume setting, skip this section.
There are 65 steps of volume attenuation, with 1 dB per step (button push), except for 0-to-1,
which is 13 dB. At maximum attenuation, no input buttons are lit, 76 dB of attenuation is
applied, and the audio output is effectively muted. At no attenuation, all input buttons are lit
and the output volume is equal to the input signal plus any gain or attenuation that is applied
to that specific input using the input audio level adjustment (see Viewing and Adjusting
the Input Audio Level on page 48). Other than the minimum and maximum volume, the
matrix switchers indicate the volume differently, depending on the model (see the table on
page 56 to read the volume display for each display scheme).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
54
For each display scheme, the input buttons blink or light sequentially to indicate the approximate
volume of the selected output. Volume is defined as a percentage of the input audio signal
that is applied to the output. From 0% of volume, the first Esc (>) button push applies 5.5%
of the input audio signal. From 5.5% on, each Esc (>) push applies 1.5% more of the input
audio signal to the output:
•
•
•
Push Esc (>) button again — 5.5% + 1.5% = 7% volume
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — Input 1 blinks slowly
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — Input 1 lights steadily
Push Esc (>) button twice more — 7% + 1.5% + 1.5% = 10% volume
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — Input 1 lights steadily
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — Input 1 and Input 2 light steadily
Push Esc (>) button 19 times more — 10% + (19 times 1.5%) = 38.5% volume
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — Input 1 through Input 5 light steadily and Input 6 blinks
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — Input 1 through Input 11 light steadily and Input 12
blinks
When all input buttons are lit, the audio output is 100% of the audio input level.
Another way to view the volume level is to think in terms of the attenuation that is applied to
the output. Attenuation reduction is indicated by the lit or blinking input buttons: when fewer
input buttons are lit, attenuation is greater (and the volume is quieter).
•
At minimum volume, all input buttons are unlit or background illuminated and 76 dB of
attenuation is applied to the output. The audio output is effectively muted.
•
The first step of volume increase causes Input 1 to blink. Attenuation is reduced by
13 dB (63 dB of attenuation is applied to the output).
•
The second step of volume increase reduces the attenuation by an additional 1 dB
(62 dB of attenuation is applied to the output). (On the XTP CrossPoint 3200, Input 1
lights steadily.)
•
Successive steps of volume increase cause consecutive input buttons to first blink and
then light steadily. (On the XTP CrossPoint 3200, each consecutive button indicates a
1 dB attenuation reduction when blinking and a 2 dB attenuation reduction when lit.)
For example: When lit steadily, Input 3 indicates the following, depending on the
matrix switcher model:
•
•
XTP CrossPoint 1600 — 52 dB of attenuation when compared to Input 3
blinking (53 dB to 55 dB of attenuation). Input 4 blinking (49 dB to 51 dB of
attenuation) is at least 2 dB less than Input 3 blinking (53 dB minus 51 dB) and at
most 6 dB less (55 dB minus 49 dB).
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200 — 58 dB of attenuation when compared to Input 3
blinking (59 dB of attenuation). Input 4 blinking (57 dB of attenuation) is 6 dB less
than Input 2 steadily-lit (60 dB minus 57 dB).
On the XTP CrossPoint 3200, the volume indications of the buttons are additive.
For example: Input 1 lit (23 dB [22 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), Input 2
lit (2 dB [1 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), and Input 3 blinking (1 dB of
attenuation reduction) indicate that the output attenuation has been reduced by a
total of 25 dB (22 dB + 2 dB + 1 dB = 25 dB).
•
At full volume, no attenuation is applied to the output and all input buttons are lit
steadily.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
55
Highest # input button lit
dB of
Output
XTP CrossPoint 1600 XTP CrossPoint 3200 attenuation volume
None
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
None
76
0%
1
63
5.5%
1
62
7%
2
61
8.5%
2
60
10%
3
59
11.5%
3
58
13%
4
57
14.5%
4
56
16%
5
55
17.5%
5
54
19%
6
53
20.5%
6
52
22%
7
51
23.5%
7
50
25%
8
49
26.5%
8
48
28%
9
47
29.5%
9
46
31%
10
45
32.5%
10
44
34%
11
43
35.5%
11
42
37%
12
41
38.5%
12
40
40%
13
39
41.5%
13
38
43%
14
37
44.5%
14
36
46%
15
35
47.5%
15
34
49%
16
33
50.5%
16
32
52%
Highest # input button lit
dB of
Output
XTP CrossPoint 1600 XTP CrossPoint 3200 attenuation volume
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
17
31
53.5%
17
30
55%
18
29
56.5%
18
28
58%
19
27
59.5%
19
26
61%
20
25
62.5%
20
24
64%
21
23
65.5%
21
22
67%
22
21
68.5%
22
20
70%
23
19
71.5%
23
18
73%
24
17
74.5%
24
16
76%
25
15
77.5%
25
14
79%
26
13
80.5%
26
12
82%
27
11
83.5%
27
10
85%
28
9
86.5%
28
8
88%
29
7
89.5%
29
6
91%
30
5
92.5%
30
4
94%
31
3
95.5%
31
2
97%
32
1
98.5%
32
0
100%
= blinking LED
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
56
Example 9: Viewing and adjusting an analog output volume level
In the following example, the audio output volume is viewed and adjusted. The steps show
the front panel indications that result from your action.
Because of the different volume display schemes, the output audio levels that result from the
following example are shown twice:
•
As displayed on an XTP CrossPoint 3200 matrix switcher
•
As displayed on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 matrix switcher
The XTP CrossPoint 3200 drawings show the actions that led up to the display.
The XTP CrossPoint 1600 drawing shows the volume display only, not the actions that
caused it.
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.
2. Select Audio mode: Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds
until it blinks.
AUDIO
Press and hold.
AUDIO
2 seconds
3. Select an output: Press and release the Output 1 button (see figure 38).
In figure 40 and figure 41, the lit or blinking input buttons indicate 41.5 percent of the
applied audio input. The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of
39 dB.
39 dB attenuation
41.5% volume
INPUTS
2 16
1
Press to light
the button.
2
1
3
1 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates that 3 percent of the total input volume
is applied to the output. The flashing button indicates an additional 1.5 percent.
Figure 40.
Select Output 1
Figure 41 shows the same volume as figure 40, but displayed on an
XTP CrossPoint 1600.
39 dB attenuation,
41.5% volume
INPUTS
1
2
Figure 41.
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Volume Display on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher
NOTE: Volume is protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can
view the volume in Lock mode 2 but you cannot change it from the front panel
(see Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59).
If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 4, the actions
are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons blink.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
57
4. Change the volume: Press and release the Esc (>) button once (see figure 42) to
increase the volume by 1.5%.
Press and release the Esc (>) button several more times (figure 42) to increase the
volume by 1.5% per button press. Note the input button indication changes that occur
each time the Esc (>) button is pressed and released.
NOTE: You can press and hold the Esc (>) or View (>) button to ramp the level up
or down by 3 dB per second to the high or low limit.
Figure 42 shows the result of pressing the Esc (>) button a total of 13 times. In
figure 42 and figure 43, the lit or blinking input buttons indicate 61 percent of the applied
audio input. The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 26 dB.
Press the button
INPUTS
ESC
2
1
Decrease the audio
attenuation (thereby
increasing the audio level)
that is applied to the
output volume level by
1 dB per button push.
3
1 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32
26 dB attenuation,
61% volume
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates that 3 percent of the total input is applied to the output.
Figure 42.
Adjust the Output Audio Volume
Figure 43 shows the same volume (61%) as in figure 42, but displayed on an
XTP CrossPoint 1600 matrix switcher.
26 dB attenuation
61% volume
INPUTS
1
2
3
Figure 43.
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Volume Display on an XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switcher
5. Exit Audio mode: Press and release the Audio button.
Press the button.
I/O
The Video button
lights green.
VIDEO
AUDIO
The Audio button stops
blinking and lights.
All input buttons and output buttons
return to unlit or background illumination.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
58
Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes)
The matrix switcher has three levels of front panel security lock that limit the operation of the
matrix switcher from the front panel. The three levels are:
•
Lock mode 0 — The front panel is completely unlocked. All front panel functions are
available.
•
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for setting Lock
mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.
•
Lock mode 2 — Basic functions are unlocked. Advanced features are locked and can
be viewed only.
Basic functions consist of:
•
Making ties
•
Saving and recalling presets
•
Setting input audio gain and attenuation
•
Changing Lock modes
Advanced functions consist of:
•
Setting audio output mutes
•
Setting audio output volume
•
Setting the rear panel remote port protocol and baud rate
NOTE: The matrix switcher is shipped from the factory in Lock mode 2.
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 0
NOTE: If the matrix switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects
mode 2. The Preset, View, and Esc buttons blink twice.
If the matrix switcher is in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 0 (unlocks the
matrix switcher). The View and Esc blink twice.
Toggle the lock on and off by pressing and holding the Preset button, the View button, and
the Esc button simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds (see figure 44).
Lock mode 2
Lock mode 0
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
C O NT R O L
ESC
Press and hold for 2 seconds.
Figure 44.
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
C O NT R O L
ESC
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
C O NT R O L
ESC
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
Press and hold for 2 seconds.
Toggle Front Panel Lock Between Mode 2 and Mode 0
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
59
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 1
NOTE:
• If the matrix switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects mode 2.
• If the matrix switcher is in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 1.
Toggle the lock on and off by pressing and holding the View button and the Esc button
simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds (see figure 45).
Lock mode 1
Lock mode 2
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
C O NT R O L
VIEW
ENTER PRESET
ESC
VIEW
C O NT R O L
ESC
Press and hold for 2 seconds.
Figure 45.
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
C O NT R O L
ESC
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
Press and hold for 2 seconds.
Toggle Front Panel Lock Between Mode 2 and Mode 1
Performing a System Reset from the Front Panel
The front panel reset is identical to issuing the E ZXXX} SIS command defined on
page 112. A system reset performs the following functions:
NOTES:
• System reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) or serial port settings or
replace user-installed firmware.
• This function resets not only the matrix switcher, but any connected endpoints.
•
Clears all ties and presets
•
Clears all mutes
•
Disables all RS-232 output inserts
•
Resets all input audio levels to unity gain (0 dB)
•
Sets all output volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation)
Reset the matrix switcher to the factory default settings by pressing and holding the View
button and Esc button simultaneously while you apply AC power to the matrix switcher
(see figure 46).
Press and hold the buttons
simultaneously while you
apply power to the switcher.
CONTROL
The switcher flashes
the button indicators
and then turns them off.
VIEW
ESC
Continue to hold the View and Esc
buttons until all input and output buttons
return to unlit and the Video and Audio
buttons light.
Power
Release the buttons.
Figure 46.
System Reset
NOTE: If background illumination was turned on before the reset, all buttons are unlit
after the reset. But, when you cycle power, background illumination returns to the
condition that you previously selected.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
60
Background Illumination
The buttons on the front panel can be set to provide amber background illumination at
all times or the background illumination can be turned off. To toggle the background
illumination on or off, press and hold the Input 1 and Input 2 buttons simultaneously for
approximately 2 seconds (see figure 47).
Press and hold the buttons.
1
2
5 16
After the illumination status of the
buttons change (after approximately
2 seconds), release the buttons.
Figure 47.
Toggle Background Illumination on or off
Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate
The matrix switchers can operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200 baud rate and
can support either RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication protocol. The settings of these
variables can be viewed and changed from the front panel.
View and configure the serial communications settings as follows:
1. Select Serial Port Configuration mode: Simultaneously press and hold all Control
buttons (Enter, Preset, View, and Esc).
Press and hold the buttons.
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
I/O
C O NT R O L
ESC
2 seconds
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
• All Control buttons light with
one flashing.
VIDEO
AUDIO
• Both I/O buttons light
with one flashing.
The flashing Control button indicates the baud rate as follows:
Enter — 9600
Preset — 19200
View — 38400
Esc — 115200
The flashing I/O button indicates the protocol as follows:
Video — RS-232
Audio — RS-422/RS-485
In this example, the port is set to RS-232 at 9600 baud.
2. Release the Control buttons.
NOTE: If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 3, the
actions are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons blink (see Setting
the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59).
3. Change a value: Press and release the button that relates to the desired value.
Press and release the button(s) to configure the port as
follows:
Baud rate:
Enter — 9600
Preset — 19200
View — 38400
Esc — 115200
Serial protocol:
Video — RS-232
Audio — RS-422/RS-485
The selected buttons blink and the others remain lit.
In this example, the port is set to RS-422 at 38400 baud.
I/O
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
61
4. Exit the Serial Port Configuration mode: Press and release an output button.
All Control and I/O buttons return
to unlit or background illumination.
Press and release
an output button.
5
I/O
C O NT R O L
ENTER PRESET
VIEW
ESC
VIDEO
AUDIO
Rear Panel Operations
The rear panel has a Reset button that initiates four levels of resets (numbered 1, 3, 4, and
5 for the sake of comparison with an Extron IPL product). The Reset button is recessed, so
use a small screwdriver, a pointed stylus, or a ballpoint pen. See the table on the next page
for a summary of the modes.
ATTENTION:
• Review the reset modes carefully. Some reset modes delete all user loaded content
and revert the device to default configuration.
• Étudier de près les différents modes de réinitialisation. Certains modes de
réinitialisation suppriment la totalité du contenu chargé de l’utilisateur et remettent
l’appareil en mode de configuration par défaut.
NOTE: The reset modes listed below close all open IP and Telnet connections and close
all sockets. Also, the following modes are separate functions, not a continuation from
Mode 1 to Mode 5.
Mode Activation
1
Hold down the recessed Reset
button while applying power to the
matrix switcher.
NOTE: After a mode 1 reset is
performed, update the
matrix switcher firmware to
the latest version. Do not
operate the matrix switcher
firmware version that
results from the mode 1 reset.
If you want to use the factory
default firmware, you must
upload that version again (see
Firmware Upgrade Page
on page 132 for details on
uploading firmware).
3
Hold down the Reset button until
the Reset LED blinks once (about
3 seconds), then press and release
Reset (<1 second) within 1 second.
Result
Purpose and
Notes
The matrix switcher reverts to the factory
default firmware. Event scripting will not
start if the matrix switcher is powered on in
this mode. All user files and settings (such
as drivers, adjustments, and IP settings) are
maintained.
Use mode 1
to revert to the
factory default
firmware version
if incompatibility
issues arise with
user-loaded
firmware.
NOTE: If you do not want to update
firmware, or you performed a mode 1
reset by mistake, cycle power to the
matrix switcher to return to the firmware
version that was running before the
mode 1 reset. Use the 0Q SIS command
(see page 115) to confirm that the
factory default firmware is no longer
running (look for the asterisk [*] following
the version number.
Mode 3 turns events on or off. During
resetting, the Reset LED blinks 2 times if
events are starting, 3 times if events are
stopping.
Mode 3 is
useful for
troubleshooting.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
62
4
Hold down the Reset button twice
(once at 3 seconds and again at 6
seconds). Then press and release
Reset (<1 second) within 1 second.
Mode 4:
• Enables ARP capability.
• Sets the IP address to the factory default.
• Sets the subnet address to the factory
default.
Mode 4 enables
you to set
IP address
information using
ARP and the
MAC address.
• Sets the gateway address to the factory
default.
• Sets port mapping to the factory default.
• Turns DHCP off.
• Turn events off.
The Reset LED blinks four times in quick
succession during the reset.
5
Hold down the Reset button until the
Reset LED blinks three times (once
at 3 seconds, again at 6 seconds,
and then again at 9 seconds). Then
press and release Reset (<1 second)
within 1 second.
Mode 5 performs a complete reset to
factory defaults (with the exception of the
firmware):
• Does everything mode 4 does.
• Resets most real time adjustments,
including:
Mode 5 is useful
if you want to
start over with
configuration and
uploading or to
replace events.
• clears all ties and presets
• clears all mutes
• disables all RS-232 output inserts
• clears all audio settings
• Resets all IP options.
• Removes/clears all files for the matrix
switcher.
The reset LED blinks four times in quick
succession during the reset.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
63
Performing a Hard Reset (Reset 1)
The hard reset function restores the matrix switcher to the base firmware that it was shipped
with. After a hard reset, events do not automatically start, but user settings and files are
restored.
Perform a hard reset as follows:
NOTE: The hard reset restores the factory-installed firmware. The matrix switcher
reverts to that factory firmware the next time power is cycled off and on unless a
firmware update is performed before the power cycle.
1. If necessary, turn off power to the matrix switcher.
2. Press and hold the Reset button on the rear panel while you apply AC power to the
matrix switcher (see figure 48).
Press and hold the button
while you apply power.
RESET
The switcher flashes the front panel
button indicators green, red, and
amber and then turns them off.
Power
Continue to hold the Reset button until
all input and output buttons return to
either unlit or to background illumination
and the Video and Audio buttons turn on.
Release the Reset button.
RESET
Figure 48.
Hard Reset
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
64
Performing Soft System Resets (Resets 3, 4, and 5)
Perform a soft reset of the matrix switcher as follows:
1. Use a small screwdriver to press and hold the rear panel Reset button until the Reset
LED and the front panel Video and Audio buttons blink the number of times for the
desired reset: once (events reset), twice (system reset), or three times (absolute reset)
(see figure 49).
Press and hold
the Reset button.
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
Reset LED flashes once.
RESET
RESET
RESET
3 seconds
Events Reset
(Mode 3)
Front panel I/O buttons flash once.
I/O
VIDEO
Press and hold
the Reset button.
AUDIO
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
Reset LED flashes twice.
RESET
RESET
RESET
6 seconds
IP Settings
Reset
(Mode 4)
Front panel I/O buttons flash twice.
I/O
VIDEO
Press and hold
the Reset button.
Reset LED flashes
three times.
RESET
Absolute Reset
(Mode 5)
AUDIO
Release, then immediately
press and release again.
RESET
RESET
9 seconds
Front panel I/O buttons flash three times.
I/O
VIDEO
Figure 49.
AUDIO
Soft System Resets
2. Release the Reset button and then immediately press and release the Reset button
again. Nothing happens if the second momentary press does not occur within 1 second.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
65
Optimizing the Analog Audio
The level for each analog audio input can be adjusted within a range of -18 dB to +24 dB,
so there are no noticeable volume differences between sources and for the best headroom
and signal-to-noise ratio. The volume for each analog audio output can be adjusted from full
loudness to effectively muted. Adjust the levels as follows:
1. Connect analog audio sources to all desired inputs and connect the analog audio
outputs to output devices such as audio players (see Input and Output Boards on
page 14). For best results, wire all of the inputs and the outputs balanced.
2. Power on the audio sources, the matrix switcher, and the audio players.
3. Switch among the inputs (see Creating a Configuration on page 37), listening to
the audio with a critical ear or measuring the output audio level with test equipment,
such as a VU meter.
4. As necessary, adjust the input audio level of each input (see Viewing and Adjusting
the Input Audio Level on page 48) so that the approximate output level is the same
for all selected inputs.
5. Tie an audio input to each analog audio output.
6. As necessary, adjust the output audio level of each output (see Viewing and Adjusting
the Analog Output Volume on page 54).
RS-232 Insertion
The XTP twisted pair and fiber input and output boards allow you to insert RS-232 control
signals onto the same XTP cable that carries video and audio to extend them to the Over
XTP port on a connected endpoint (see figure 50 on the next page and figure 51 on
page 70). The control signals can be inserted two ways:
Ethernet to RS-232 insertion (see Ethernet to RS-232 Insertion on the next page) —
•
A control signal applied to the matrix switcher LAN port can be routed to any matrix
switcher XTP port.
Captive screw insertion (see Captive Screw Signal Insertion on page 69) —
•
A control signal applied to an RS-232 captive screw port on an XTP board is tied
directly to the same-numbered XTP port on that board.
•
•
RS-232 port 1 is tied to XTP port 1 only, 2 is tied to 2, and so on.
You must physically connect a cable connected to the captive screw connector where a
control signal is to be inserted.
The insert inputs and outputs, whether inserted via Ethernet or captive screw connectors,
can support up to a 115k baud rate.
Enabling Ethernet and Captive Screw Insertion
For an XTP port to distribute the inserted signal, it must be enabled for either Ethernet
insertion or captive screw insertion (default). The simplest way to make this selection is
using the XTP Configuration Software.
Alternatively, you can make this selection via SIS commands.
•
For the input XTP and fiber boards, see the input board Captive screw and Ethernet
serial port insertion enables SIS commands on page 92.
•
For the output XTP and fiber boards, see the output board Captive screw and
Ethernet serial port insertion enables SIS commands on page 105.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
66
Ethernet to RS-232 Insertion
Figure 50 is an example of a typical Ethernet to RS-232 insertion, in which an Extron IPCP
module provides control of an HD camera via the matrix switcher. Configure this type of
insertion as follows:
1. Connect a TP cable from the IPCP module to the LAN port, directly or via a network.
2. If necessary, enable the port (input port 4 in this example) for Ethernet (see Enabling
Ethernet and Captive Screw Insertion on the previous page).
3. If necessary to match the device to be controlled, configure the port RS-232 protocol
(baud rate, parity, data bits, and stop bits) (see RS-232 protocol on page 69).
4. Connect the XTP cable to the endpoint as usual.
5. Connect a serial cable from the endpoint to the device to be controlled.
Network
RS-232
Insertion
IPCP
Module
IN
SIG
LINK
SIG
IN
SIG
SIG
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP
SIG
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
RS-232
PWR
XTP
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
IR
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
LINK
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
PWR
IR
IR
RS-232
IR
RS-232
IR
5−8
XTP
IN
SIG
LINK
SIG
PWR
9−12
IN
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP
SIG
LINK
SIG
SIG
LINK
SIG
REMOTE
RS-232/RS-422
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
IR
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
LINK
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
PWR
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LINK
PWR
XTP
PWR
XTP
XTP
PWR
XTP
LINK
PWR
13−16
XTP
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
IN
LINK
IN
LAN
IN
ACT
PWR
INPUTS
LINK
PWR
XTP
IN
PWR
1−4
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LAN
RESET
ACT
LINK
OUTPUTS
1−4
DISCONNECT POWER
CORD BEFORE
SERVICING
100-240V 12.0A MAX
5−8
9−12
13−16
50-60Hz
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
RS-232
INPUTS
POWER
12V
0.7A MAX
HDMI
XTP T HDMI
LOOP THRU
OFF
OVER XTP
AUDIO
AUDIO
ON
L
+
RS-232
R
−
+
−
SIG
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RESET
XTP OUT
LAN
XTP T HDMI
RS-232
HD Camera
Figure 50.
Typical Ethernet to RS-232 Insertion to an Input Endpoint
Port number
For Ethernet to RS-232 insertion, the insertion port number must be stated from a specific
starting point. This number is entered as the Telnet port number when you establish
communication with the insertion port.
For the purposes of this discussion, consider the Ethernet insertion ports as serial (RS-232)
ports. The rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port and all input serial ports in the matrix
switcher are numbered sequentially (see the table on the next page for the default values).
Output serial ports start 34 XTP CrossPoint positions out from the starting point and
continue on sequentially.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
67
UART Default Values
Port
1600
3200
Port
1600
3200
Serial
1999
Input 1
2001
Output 1
2033
Input 2
2002
Output 2
2034
Input 3
2003
Output 3
2035
Input 4
2004
Output 4
2036
Input 5
2005
Output 5
2037
Input 6
2006
Output 6
2038
Input 7
2007
Output 7
2039
Input 8
2008
Output 8
2040
Input 9
2009
Output 9
2041
Input 10
2010
Output 10
2042
Input 11
2011
Output 11
2043
Input 12
2012
Output 12
2044
Input 13
2013
Output 13
2045
Input 14
2014
Output 14
2046
Input 15
2015
Output 15
2047
Input 16
2016
Output 16
2048
Input 17
2017
Output 17
2049
Input 18
2018
Output 18
2050
Input 19
2019
Output 19
2051
Input 20
2020
Output 20
2052
Input 21
2021
Output 21
2053
Input 22
2022
Output 22
2054
Input 23
2023
Output 23
2055
Input 24
2024
Output 24
2056
Input 25
2025
Output 25
2057
Input 26
2026
Output 26
2058
Input 27
2027
Output 27
2059
Input 28
2028
Output 28
2060
Input 29
2029
Output 29
2061
Input 30
2030
Output 30
2062
Input 31
2031
Output 31
2063
Input 32
2032
Output 32
2064
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
68
Changing the starting point
You can change the starting port number. The simplest way to make this change is using
the XTP Configuration Software.
Alternatively, you can change the starting port number via SIS commands.
•
For the input XTP and fiber boards, see the input board Set UART starting point
SIS command on page 92.
•
For the output XTP and fiber boards, see the output board Set UART starting point
SIS commands on page 106.
RS-232 protocol
You may also need to set the RS-232 protocol of the addressed port to match the connected
device. The simplest way to make this change is using the XTP Configuration Software.
Alternatively, you can change the port RS-232 settings via SIS commands.
•
For the input XTP and fiber boards, see the input board Set serial port parameters
SIS command on page 92.
•
For the output XTP and fiber boards, see the output board Set serial port parameters
SIS commands on page 105.
Captive Screw Signal Insertion
Figure 51 is an example of a typical captive screw insertion, in which an Extron IPCP module
provides control of a Blu-Ray player via the matrix switcher. Configure this type of insertion
as follows:
NOTE: Each captive screw insert is for the associated input or output only and cannot
be tied to any other input or output.
1. Connect a TP cable from the IPCP module to the RS-232 captive screw port
(input port 13 in this example).
2. If necessary, enable the port for captive screw (see Enabling Ethernet and Captive
Screw Insertion on page 66).
The RS-232 control signal is inserted directly onto the XTP port of the same number
and cannot be tied to any other port.
3. Connect the XTP cable to the endpoint as usual.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
69
4. Connect a serial cable from the endpoint to the device to be controlled.
IPCP
Module
IN
SIG
LINK
SIG
IN
SIG
SIG
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP
SIG
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
LINK
SIG
PWR
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
RS-232
PWR
XTP
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
ACT
LAN
LINK
IR
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
LINK
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
PWR
IR
IR
RS-232
IR
RS-232
IR
5−8
XTP
IN
SIG
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
9−12
IN
SIG
SIG
LINK
SIG
SIG
SIG
REMOTE
RS-232/RS-422
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
IR
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
RS-232
LINK
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
PWR
XTP
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LINK
PWR
XTP
LINK
PWR
XTP
XTP
LINK
PWR
XTP
PWR
13−16
LINK
PWR
XTP
XTP
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
IN
LINK
IN
LAN
IN
ACT
PWR
INPUTS
LINK
PWR
XTP
IN
PWR
1−4
RS-232
Insertion
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
LAN
RESET
ACT
LINK
OUTPUTS
1−4
DISCONNECT POWER
CORD BEFORE
SERVICING
100-240V 12.0A MAX
5−8
9−12
13−16
50-60Hz
XTP CROSSPOINT 1600
RS-232
INPUTS
POWER
12V
0.7A MAX
HDMI
XTP T HDMI
LOOP THRU
OFF
OVER XTP
AUDIO
AUDIO
ON
L
+
RS-232
R
−
+
−
SIG
LINK
IR
Tx Rx G Tx Rx
RESET
XTP OUT
LAN
XTP T HDMI
RS-232
FULL HIGH DEFINITION 1080P VIDEO OUTPUT
TM
BLU-RAY DISC PLAYER
Blu-Ray Player
Figure 51.
Typical Captive Screw Insertion to an Input Endpoint
Troubleshooting
This section recommends what to do if you have problems operating the matrix switcher.
1. Ensure that all devices are plugged in and powered on.
2. Check to see if one or more outputs are muted.
3. Ensure an active input is selected for output on the matrix switcher.
4. Ensure that the proper signal format is supplied.
5. Check the cabling and make corrections as necessary.
6. Call the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline if necessary. See
www.extron.com for the phone number in your region of the world.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
70
Configuration Worksheets
Rather than trying to remember the configuration for each preset, use worksheets to record
this information. Make copies of the blank worksheet on page 74 (XTP CrossPoint 3200)
or page 75 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) and use one for each preset configuration. Cross out
all unused or inactive inputs and outputs. Use different colors for video and audio.
NOTE: All of the equipment in the following examples is connected through the
appropriate input board, output board, transmitter, or receiver.
Worksheet Example 1: System Equipment
Figure 52 shows a portion of a worksheet for an XTP CrossPoint 1600 in a fictional
organization with the system hardware annotated. Inputs 10, 11, and 13 have no
connection in this organization, so they are crossed out on the worksheet. Similarly,
outputs 7 and 9 through 16 are crossed out.
Input sources
Camera/
Camera
mic - Main
#2
podium
PC 1
PC 2
RGB-HDMI RGB-HDMI
300A
300A
Audio
CD
Classroom Classroom
#1 BluRay #2 BluRay
DVS 605 DVS 605
Laptop
Streaming
(DVS 605)
VTG 400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Main hall
FP #1
Main hall
FP #2
Podium
monitor
Sound
system
#1
Sound
system
#2
VCR
(VSC 500)
DA 6
Output destinations
Preset #
3
Title: Weekly status mtg Video:
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.
Figure 52.
Audio:
Worksheet Example 1: System Equipment
Inputs include PCs, an audio CD player, cameras, and an Extron VTG 400DVI. Output
devices include monitors, projectors, a stereo, a VCR for recording presentations, and a DA.
The VTG 400DVI video test generator connected to input 12 enables a video test pattern to
be sent to one, several, or all output devices for problem isolation or adjustment purposes.
An audio test tape or CD could be used in a similar manner to check out the audio
components.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
71
Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration
Figure 53 continues from worksheet example 1 by showing the video and audio ties that
make up the configuration of preset 1. Black lines show video ties and red lines show the
audio ties.
Input sources
Camera/
Camera
mic - Main
#2
podium
PC 1
PC 2
RGB-HDMI RGB-HDMI
300A
300A
Audio
CD
Classroom Classroom
#1 BluRay #2 BluRay
DVS 605 DVS 605
Laptop
Streaming
(DVS 605)
VTG 400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Main hall
FP #1
Main hall
FP #2
Podium
monitor
Sound
system
#1
Sound
system
#2
VCR
(VSC 500)
DA 6
Output destinations
Preset #
3
Title: Weekly status mtg Video:
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.
Figure 53.
Audio:
Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration
In this example:
•
•
•
•
The image of the presenter, from the main podium camera (input 1), is:
•
Displayed in the main hall (output 1)
•
Displayed in the lobby via a distribution amplifier (output 8)
•
Tied to the VCR (output 6)
The presenter has a presentation on her laptop computer (input 4) that is:
•
Displayed in the main hall (output 2)
•
Displayed locally on the podium (output 3)
The audio from the microphone the presenter uses (input 1) is:
•
Played in the hall (output 1)
•
Played in the conference room (output 4)
•
Sent to the VCR (output 6)
Classical music from the CD player (input 5) is:
•
Played in the background in the main hall on sound system #2 (output 5)
•
Played in the lobby via a distribution amplifier (output 8)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
72
Worksheet Example 3: Test Configuration
The AV system in our fictional organization needs to be fine tuned on a regular basis.
Figure 54 shows a typical test configuration, with an Extron video test generator (input 12)
generating a test pattern to all monitors (outputs 1, 2, 3, and 8). Sound checks are run from
the CD player (input 5) to all audio systems (outputs 1, 2, 4, 5, and 8).
Input sources
Camera/
Camera
mic - Main
#2
podium
PC 1
PC 2
RGB-HDMI RGB-HDMI
300A
300A
Audio
CD
Classroom Classroom
#1 BluRay #2 BluRay
DVS 605 DVS 605
Laptop
Streaming
(DVS 605)
VTG 400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Main hall
FP #1
Main hall
FP #2
Podium
monitor
Sound
system
#1
Sound
system
#2
VCR
(VSC 500)
DA 6
Output destinations
Preset #
3
Title: Weekly status mtg Video:
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.
Figure 54.
Audio:
Worksheet Example 3: Test Configuration
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
73
18
17
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
Title:
19
3
19
3
20
4
20
4
21
5
21
5
Video:
22
6
22
6
23
7
23
7
24
8
24
8
25
9
25
9
Audio:
Output destinations
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for Video, Audio, or both.
Preset #
2
18
17
1
2
1
Input sources
26
10
26
10
27
11
27
11
28
12
28
12
29
13
29
13
30
14
30
14
31
15
31
15
32
16
32
16
XTP CrossPoint 3200 Matrix Switchers Configuration Worksheet
74
2
1
Title:
3
3
4
4
5
5
Video:
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
Audio:
Output destinations
Fill in the preset number and use colors, or dashes, etc. to make connecting lines.
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.
Preset #
2
1
Input sources
11
11
10
10
12
12
13
13
14
14
15
15
16
16
XTP CrossPoint 1600 Matrix Switchers Configuration Worksheet
XTP CrossPoint Series • Operation
75
Programming Guide
The XTP CrossPoint Series Matrix Switcher can be remotely controlled via:
•
The XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System Configuration Software
Help file, available at www.extron.com).
•
Built-in HTML pages (see HTML Operation, beginning on page 121)
•
SIS commands (see below)
This section describes the operation of the XTP CrossPoint Series Matrix Switchers via SIS
commands, including:
•
Local Host-Control Ports
•
Ethernet (LAN) Port
•
Host-to-Matrix-Switcher Instructions
•
Matrix-Switcher-Initiated Messages
•
Matrix Switcher Error Responses
•
Using the Command and Response Tables
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Basic Matrix Switcher Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Board-Specific Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Endpoint-Specific Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Board-Specific Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Endpoint-Specific Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Advanced Matrix Switcher Commands
•
SIS Command and Response Table for IP- and Remote Port-Specific
Commands
•
Special Characters
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
76
Local Host-Control Ports
The matrix switcher has two local ports that can be directly connected to a host device such
as a computer running the Extron DataViewer utility or a control system. These ports make
remote control of the matrix switcher possible using a direct connection. The local ports are:
•
The rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port, a serial port on a 9-pin D female
connector (see Remote RS-232/RS-422 port on page 26)
NOTES:
• The rear panel and front panel ports are independent of one another. A front
panel Configuration port connection and a rear panel Remote port connection
can be active at the same time.
• The serial port protocol of the rear panel Remote RS-232/RS-422 port is:
• 9600 baud
• No parity
• No flow
• 1 stop bit
• 8-bit
• See Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate on
page 61 to configure the rear panel Remote port from the front panel.
• Extron recommends leaving the Remote RS-232/RS-422 port at 9600 baud.
•
The front panel Configuration port, a mini USB B port (see Configuration port on
page 27). A standard USB cable and the Extron DataViewer utility, version 2.0 or
newer, can be used for connection to the Configuration port.
NOTE: Before you use the Configuration (USB) port for the first time, you need to
install and activate the USB driver on your computer. The simplest way to do this
is to install and run the XTP System Configuration software (see the XTP System
Configuration Software help file, available at www.extron.com).
Ethernet (LAN) Port
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and
must be properly terminated for your application (see LAN port on page 26).
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher.
•
Patch (straight-through) cable — Connection of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix
switcher to an Ethernet LAN.
Default IP addresses
To access the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher via the LAN port, you need the IP
address for the unit, and may need the subnet mask and the gateway address. If the IP
address has been changed to an address comprised of words and characters, you can
determine the actual numeric IP address using the ping (ICMP) utility (see Ethernet Link on
page 150 for more details). If the addresses have not been changed, the factory-specified
defaults are:
•
IP address
192.168.254.254
•
Subnet mask
255.255.0.0
•
Gateway address
0.0.0.0
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
77
Establishing a Connection
Establish a network connection to an XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher as follows:
1. Open a TCP socket to port 23 using the IP address of the matrix switcher.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the
factory-specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
The matrix switcher responds with a copyright message including the date, the name of
the product, firmware version, part number, and the current date and time.
NOTES:
• If the matrix switcher is not password-protected, the device is ready to accept
SIS commands immediately after it sends the copyright message.
• If the matrix switcher is password-protected, a password prompt appears
below the copyright message.
2. If the matrix switcher is password-protected, enter the appropriate administrator or user
password.
If the password is accepted, the matrix switcher responds with Login User or Login
Administrator.
If the password is not accepted, the Password prompt reappears.
Connection Timeouts
The Ethernet link times out after a designated period of time of no communications. By
default, this timeout value is set to five minutes but the value can be changed (see the
Configure port timeout SIS commands on page 120).
NOTE: Extron recommends leaving the default timeout at 5 minutes and periodically
issuing the Query (Q) command to keep the connection active. If there are long idle
periods, Extron recommends disconnecting the socket and reopening the connection
when another command must be sent.
Number of Connections
An XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can have up to 200 simultaneous TCP
connections, including all http sockets and telnet connections. When the connection limit
is reached, the matrix switcher accepts no new connections until some have been closed.
No error message or indication is given that the connection limit has been reached. To
maximize performance of an IP Link device, the number of connections should stay low and
unnecessary open sockets should be closed.
Using Verbose Mode
Telnet connections to an XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can be used to monitor
for changes that occur on the matrix switcher, such as front panel operations and SIS
commands from other telnet sockets or a serial port. For a telnet session to receive change
notices from the matrix switcher, the telnet session must be in verbose mode 1 or 3 (see
the Verbose mode definitions on page 118). In verbose mode 1 and 3, the telnet socket
reports changes in messages that resemble SIS command responses.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
78
Host-to-Matrix-Switcher Instructions
The matrix switcher accepts SIS (Simple Instruction Set) commands through the rear panel
Remote RS-232/RS-422 port, the front panel Configuration port, and the rear panel Ethernet
(LAN) Port. SIS commands consist of one or more characters per command field. They do not
require any special characters to begin or end the command character sequence. Each matrix
switcher response to an SIS command ends with a carriage return and a line feed (CR/LF = ]),
which signals the end of the response character string. A string is one or more characters.
Matrix-Switcher-Initiated Messages
When a local event such as a front panel operation occurs, the matrix switcher responds
by sending a message to the host. The matrix switcher-initiated messages are listed below
(underlined).
The matrix switcher does not expect a response from the host, but, for example, the host
program might request a new status.
(c) Copyright 20yy, Extron Electronics, XTP CP nn00, Vx.xx, 60-nnnn-01]
<day, date, time>]
The matrix switcher initiates the Copyright message when it is first powered on or when a
connection via Internet protocol (IP) is established. Vx.xx is the firmware version number and
60-nnnn-01 is the matrix switcher part number.
NOTE: <day, date, time> are reported only if the connection is via the LAN port.
Password:]
The matrix switcher initiates the Password message immediately after the copyright message
when the controlling system is connected using TCP/IP or Telnet and the matrix switcher is
password protected. This message means that the matrix switcher requires an administrator
or user level password before it will perform the commands entered via this link. The matrix
switcher repeats the password message response for every entry other than a valid password
until a valid password is entered.
]Login
]Login
Administrator]
User]
The matrix switcher initiates the Login message when a correct administrator or user password
has been entered. If the user and administrator passwords are the same, the matrix switcher
defaults to administrator privileges.
Qik]
The matrix switcher initiates the Qik message when a front panel tie creation has occurred.
PrstSnn]
The matrix switcher initiates the PrstS message when a memory preset has been saved from
the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.
PrstRnn]
The matrix switcher initiates the PrstR message when a memory preset has been recalled from
the front panel. “nn” is the preset number.
Innn•Audxx]
The matrix switcher initiates the Aud message when a front panel input audio level change has
occurred. “n” is the input number and “xx” is the dB level.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
79
Outnn•Volxx]
The matrix switcher initiates the Vol message when a front panel output audio volume
change has occurred. nn is the output number and xx is the volume level.
Vmtnn*x]
The matrix switcher initiates the Vmt message when an output video mute is toggled on or
off from the front panel. nn is the output number and x is the mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.
Amtnn*x]
The matrix switcher initiates the Amt message when an output audio mute is toggled on or
off from the front panel. nn is the output number and x is the mute status: 1 = on, 0 = off.
Execn]
The matrix switcher initiates the Exec message when the front panel security lockout
(Executive mode) is switched from the front panel. “n” is the Executive mode: 0, 1, or 2.
Matrix Switcher Error Responses
When the matrix switcher receives an SIS command and determines that it is valid, it
performs the command and sends a response to the host device. If the matrix switcher
is unable to perform the command because the command is invalid or contains invalid
parameters, the matrix switcher returns an error response to the host. The error response
codes are:
— Invalid input channel number (out of range)
— Invalid command
— Invalid preset number (out of range)
— Invalid output number (out of range)
— Invalid value (out of range)
— Invalid command for this configuration
— Timeout (caused only by direct write of global presets)
— Busy
— Privileges violation (Users have access to all view and read commands [other than
the administrator password], and can create ties, presets, and audio mutes
E25 — Device not present
E26 — Maximum number of connections exceeded
E27 — Invalid event number
E28 — Bad filename / file not found
E01
E10
E11
E12
E13
E14
E17
E22
E24
Using the Command and Response Tables
The command and response tables begin on page 87. Symbols used in the tables
represent variables in the command and response fields. Command and response examples
are shown throughout the tables. With the exception of the audio input gain and attenuation
commands, the SIS commands are not case sensitive. The ASCII to HEX conversion table
below is for use with the command and response table.
Space
ASCII to Hex Conversion Table
•
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
80
Arrangement of Command and Response Tables
Different board types and endpoint types accept different types of commands. There
is some repetition in the command and response tables, depending on the input and
output for which the commands are appropriate. Additionally, basic whole-matrix-switcher
commands, more advanced whole-matrix-switcher commands, and IP- and remote port
setup commands are presented in separate command and response tables.
The following pages present seven command and response tables, each defining a subset
of SIS commands and their responses, with examples where appropriate. The tables that
are presented are listed below. For increased detail as to where each command family is
presented, see the table below, the table on the next page, and the table on page 83.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Basic Matrix Switcher Commands,
starting on page 87 — SIS commands for basic, everyday functions of the
XTP CrossPointSeries matrix switcher frame.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Board-Specific Commands,
starting on page 88 — SIS commands to control and monitor the inputs to the matrix
switcher via assorted input boards.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Endpoint-Specific Commands,
starting on page 96 — SIS commands to control and monitor XTP transmitter and
XTP switcher endpoints from the matrix switcher.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Board-Specific Commands,
starting on page 103 — SIS commands to control and monitor the outputs from the
matrix switcher via assorted output boards.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Endpoint-Specific Commands,
starting on page 107 — SIS commands to control and monitor XTP receiver endpoints
from the matrix switcher.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for Advanced Matrix Switcher
Commands, starting on page 111 — SIS commands for advanced functions of the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher frame.
•
SIS Command and Response Table for IP- and Remote Port-Specific
Commands, starting on page 119 — SIS commands to control and monitor the IP
interface and Remote RS-232/RS-422 port of the XTP CrossPoint matrix switcher.
Matrix Switcher Enclosure Commands
Command
family
Basic
Create ties
Page 87
View ties
Page 88
Recall global presets
Page 88
Advanced
Black video resolution
within matrix switcher
Page 111
Test patterns
Page 111
Names
Page 111
Front panel locks
Page 111
Create global presets
Page 112
Resets
Page 112
View settings
Page 113
File directory
Page 114
Information requests
Page 115
IP and remote port setup
IP and Remote Port
Page 119
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
81
Input boards
Command
family
XTP
XTP 4K
Fiber
EDID
Page
88
Page
88
Input sync
detection
Page
91
DVI Pro
3G
HD-SDI
SDI
VGA
XTP T HDMI
XTP T HD 4K
XTP T HWP 101
XTP T HWP 101 4K
XTP FT HD 4K
XTP T USW 103
XTP T USW 103 4K
XTP T VGA
XTP T FB 202
XTP T FB 202 4K
XTP T UWP 202
XTP T UWP 202 4K
XTP T UWP 302
XTP T EU 202
XTP T MK 202
Page 88
Page
88
Page
88
Page
88
Page 96
Page 96
Page 96
Page 96
Page
91
Page 91
Page
91
Page
91
Page
91
Page 97
Page 99
Page 101
Page 102
N/A
N/A
Page 91
Page
91
Page
91
Page
91
Page 96
Page 96
Page 96
Page 96
Audio routing
selections
N/A
N/A
Page 91
Page
91
Page
91
N/A
Page 97
Page 99
N/A
Page 101
HDCP authorized
device
N/A
N/A
Page 91
Page
91
N/A
N/A
Page 97
Page 99
N/A
Page 101
N/A
N/A
Page 92
Page
92
N/A
N/A
Page 97
Page 99
N/A
Page 102
Captive screw and
Ethernet serial
port insertions
Page
92
Page
92
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ethernet serial
port insert
parameters
Page
92
Page
92
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
93
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
93
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 98
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page 98
Page 99
Page 102
Input audio level
HDCP status
XTP power
AES digital audio
Input selection
Input video format
Image reset
Color
Tint
Brightness
Contrast
Pixel phase
Horizontal shift
Vertical shift
Save and recall
analog input
presets
4K HDMI
HDMI
HDMI DMA
Input Endpoints
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
Page 98
Page 99
Page 102
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
N/A
Page 100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
N/A
Page 100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
N/A
Page 100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
94
N/A
N/A
Page 100
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
95
N/A
Page 98
Page 100
Page 102
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
95
N/A
Page 98
Page 101
Page 102
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
95
N/A
Page 98
Page 101
Page 102
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Page
95
N/A
Page 98
Page 101
N/A
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
82
Output boards
Command
family
XTP
XTP 4K
Output endpoints
Fiber
4K HDMI
HDMI
DVI Pro
Analog
audio
XTP R HDMI
XTP R HD 4K
XTP R HWP 201
XTP R HWP 201 4K
XTP FR HD 4K
XTP SR HDMI
XTP SR HD 4K
XTP SFR HD 4K
Audio routing selections
N/A
N/A
Page 103
Page 103
N/A
Page 107
Page 109
HDCP status
N/A
Page 103
Page 103
Page 103
N/A
Page 108
Page 109
Captive screw and Ethernet
serial port insertions
Page 105
Page 105
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Ethernet serial port insert
parameters
Page 105
Page 105
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
XTP power
Page 106
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Video mutes
N/A
Page 103
Page 103
Page 103
N/A
Page 107
Page 108
Output audio volume
N/A
N/A
Page 104
Page 104
Page 104
Page 107
Page 109
Audio mutes
N/A
N/A
Page 105
Page 105
Page 105
Page 107
Page 109
Page 108
Page 110
N/A
Page 105
Page 105
Page 105
Page 105
Page 108
Page 110
Relay controls
View video and audio mutes
Symbol definitions
]
}
•
E
X!
X@
X#
= Carriage return and line feed
= Carriage return
(| pipe can be used interchangeably)
= Space character
= Escape key
(W can be used interchangeably)
= Input number (for ties)
00 to 16 or 32 (00 = untied)
= Output number
01 to 16 or 32
= Global preset number
00 to 32 (00 = current configuration, applies to view
ties command only)
X$ = EDID value
X% = Input signal status
See the table beginning on page 89.
X^ = Input number (for other
01 to 16 or 32 (also addressed input on matrix
functions than ties)
= Audio gain
X&
X* = Numeric dB value
0 = no signal detected
1 = sync detected
switcher endpoints [ sub-inputs])
00 to 24 (1 dB steps)
-18 to +24 (43 steps of gain or attenuation) (0 dB =
default)
X( = Audio attenuation
X1) = Resolution and rate for
1 to 18 (1 dB steps)
X1! = Input audio source
0 = auto (see the example on page 91)
1 = HDMI (de-embedded digital audio) (default)
2 = analog 2-channel audio
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
0 = off
1 = on (default)
X1# = HDCP status (for inputs)
0 = no source device connected
1 = source connected is HDCP-compliant
2 = source connected is not HDCP-compliant
X1$ = Captive screw or UART
0 = captive screw RS-232 insert (default)
1 = Ethernet RS-232 insert (UART)
black screen
2 = 1280x720p @ 50 Hz
4 = 1280x720p @ 60 Hz
6 = 1920x1080p @ 60 Hz
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
83
X1% = Port number
01 = remote RS-232/RS-422 port
02 = unused
X1^ = Baud rate
300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200,
9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200
X1& = Parity
O
E
N
M
S
X1* = Data bits
X1( = Stop bits
X2) = Port timeout interval (in 10
7, 8 (default)
second increments)
NOTE:
X9@.
= odd
= even
= none (default)
= mark
= space
1 (default), 2
1 (10 seconds) to 65000
30 = 300 seconds or 5 minutes (default)
X1% through X2) are repeated on page 118 as X7( through X8# and
X2! = UART starting point
The starting point (X2!) is the front panel
RS-232/RS-422 port.
The next position (X2! +1) is not used.
X2! +2 to X2! +17 = inputs (XTP CrossPoint 1600)
X2! +2 to X2! +33 = inputs (XTP CrossPoint 3200)
X2! +33 to X2! +48 = outputs (XTP CrossPoint 1600)
X2! +34 to X2! +85 = outputs (XTP CrossPoint 3200)
Default values:
1999 = rear panel remote RS-232/RS-422 port
2000 = unused
2001 to 2016 = XTP CrossPoint 1600 inputs
2001 to 2032 = XTP CrossPoint 3200 inputs
2033 to 2048 = XTP CrossPoint 1600 outputs
2033 to 2064 = XTP CrossPoint 3200 outputs
X2@ = Enable or disable
0 = disable
1 = enable
X2# = Amount of power requested
X2$ = Power status
00 or 13 (watts)
X2% = Wattage
Power usage in 0.1 watt increments.
Example: 260 = 26.0 watts.
X2^ = Power supply status
0 = ok
1 = no ok
X2& = AESC digital channel pair
X2* = AESG digital channel group
X2( = Input video source
1 (default) or 2
0
1
2
3
4
= unpowered endpoint
= power provided to endpoint
= power available but disabled
= no power available, but enabled
= fault
1 (default) or 2
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
= auto
= video
= s-video
= RGBcvS (SCART)
= YUV interlace
= RGB
= YUV
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
84
X3) = Detected video format
X3!
X3@
X3#
X3$
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
= no signal detected
= video
= s-video
= RGBcvS (SCART)
= YUV interlace
= RGB
= YUV
= Picture adjustments
000 to 255 (128 = default)
= Shift
0 to 65535
= Analog input preset
0 through 8
= Output audio source
0 = original HDMI audio
1 = embed audio
X3% = HDCP status (for outputs)
0, 2, 4, or 6 = no monitor connected
1, 3, or 5 = monitor connected but the video signal
is not encrypted
7 = monitor connected and the video signal is
encrypted
X3^ = Volume adjustment range
00 through 64 (1 dB per step except for 0 to 1,
X3& = Digital and analog audio
0
1
2
3
= no mutes (default)
= digital audio mute
= analog audio mute
= analog and digital audio mute
X3* = Video and audio mute
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
= no mutes (default)
= video mute
= digital audio mute
= video and digital audio mute
= analog audio mute
= video and analog audio mute
= digital and analog audio mute
= video, digital audio, and analog audio mute
X3( = Relay on endpoint
X4) = Pulse duration
1 or 2
X4! = Relay status
0 = off
1 = on
X4@ = Test pattern
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
mute status
status
which is 13 dB) (see the table on page 104)
0 to 65535 (each step = 16 ms, see the Example
on page 108)
= disable (default)
= color bars, 720p @ 50 Hz
= black field, 720p @ 50 Hz
= color bars, 720p @ 60 Hz
= black field, 720p @ 60 Hz
= color bars, 1080p @ 60 Hz
= black field, 1080p @ 60 Hz
= color bars and audio, 720p @ 50 Hz
= black field and audio, 720p @ 50 Hz
= color bars and audio, 720p @ 60 Hz
= black field and audio, 720p @ 60 Hz
= color bars and audio, 1080p @ 60 Hz
= black field and audio, 1080p @ 60 Hz
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
85
X4# = Name
12 characters maximum
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions
(see Special Characters on page 120).
X4$ = Lock mode
0 = mode 0
1 = mode 1
2 = mode 2 (default)
X4% = Number of inputs
X4^ = Number of outputs
X4& = Installed input board
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 32
A
F
G
H
I
K
N
P
T
X
= XTP CP 4i 4K (TP)
= XTP CP 4i VGA
= XTP CP 4i (TP)
= XTP CP 4i HDMI
= XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
= XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA
= XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K
= XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI
= XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS
= no board installed
X4* = Installed output board
B
D
E
J
M
O
U
X
= XTP CP 4o 4K (TP)
= XTP CP 4o (TP)
= XTP CP 4o HDMI
= XTP CP 4o DVI Pro
= XTP CP 4o SA (stereo audio)
= XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K
= XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS
= no board installed
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 32
X4( = Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)
X5) = Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time (see Query firmware
version (verbose) command on page 115)
X5!
X5@
X5#
X5$
= Voltage
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude
= Internal temperature
Degrees Fahrenheit
= Fan speed
in RPM
= Power supply installed
status
0 = no power supply installed
1 = power supply installed
X5% = Transmitter endpoint input
1 to 2 or 1 to 3 depending on the transmitter
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
86
SIS Command and Response Table for Basic Matrix Switcher
Commands
The table that starts below shows commands for basic operation of the XTP CrossPoint
Series matrix switcher frame. Commands shown affect the entire matrix switcher, regardless
of the input boards and output boards installed or any connected endpoints.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Create Ties
NOTES:
•
•
•
•
Commands can be entered back-to-back in a string, with no spaces. For example: 1*1!02*02&003*003%4*8$.
The quick multiple tie and tie input to all output commands activate all I/O switches simultaneously.
The matrix switchers support 1-, 2-, and 3-digit numeric entries (1*1, 02*02, or 001*001).
The & tie command for RGB and the % tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix switchers.
Tie input video and audio to output
X!*X@!
OutX@•InX!•All]
Example:
Tie input video (RGB) only to output
Example (see last Notes bullet,
above):
Tie input video only to output
Example (see last Notes bullet,
above):
Tie input audio only to output
Example:
1*3!
Out03•In01•All]
X!*X@&
OutX@•InX!•RGB]
10*4&
Out04•In10•RGB]
X!*X@%
OutX@•InX!•Vid]
7*5%
Out05•In07•Vid]
X!*X@$
OutX@•InX!•Aud]
12*4$
Out04•In12•Aud]
Tie the input X! video and audio to
output X@.
Tie input 1 video and audio to output 3.
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 10 RGB to output 4.
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 7 video to output 5.
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 12 audio to output 4.
NOTE: Audio is not routed to an output HDMI connector if there is no video input tied to it. Insert a black video signal into audio
breakaway ties using the EBAFMT command on page 103 and the EEAFMT commands on page 97 and page 99 to make
an audio-only tie.
Untie input video and audio
0*X@!
OutX@•In00•All]
Quick multiple tie
Example:
E+QX!*X@!...X!*X@$}
E+Q3*4!3*5%3*6$}
Qik]
Tie input to all outputs, video and
audio
Example:
X!*!
InX!•All]
5*!
In05•All]
Tie input 5 video and audio to all
outputs.
X!*&
InX!•RGB]
Audio breakaway.
8*&
In08•RGB]
Tie input 8 RGB to all outputs.
X!*%
InX!•Vid]
10*%
In10•Vid]
Audio breakaway.
Tie input 10 video to all outputs.
X!*$
InX!•Aud]
Audio breakaway.
Qik]
Untie the video and audio input from
output X@.
Tie input 3 video and audio to
output 4, tie input 3 video to output 5,
and tie input 3 audio to output 6.
NOTE: 0*! clears all ties.
Tie input to all outputs, RGB (video)
only
Example (see last Notes bullet,
above):
Tie input to all outputs, video only
Example (see last Notes bullet,
above):
Tie input to all outputs, audio only
KEY:
X! = Input number
X@ = Output number
00 – 16, 32, or 64 (00 = untied)
01 – 16, 32, or 64
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
87
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Read ties
NOTE: The & read tie command for RGB and the % read tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix switchers.
X@&
X@%
X@$
Read RGB (video) output tie
Read video output tie
Read audio output tie
X!]
X!]
X!]
RGB input X! is tied to output X@.
Video input X! is tied to output X@.
Audio input X! is tied to output X@.
Recall global input presets
NOTES:
•
Save presets from the front panel (see Example 5: Saving a preset on page 44) or via the Save current configuration as a
global preset SIS command on page 112).
•
If you try to recall a global preset that is not saved, the matrix switcher responds with the error code E11.
ERX#PRST}
ER5PRST}
Recall a global input preset
Example:
PrstRX#]
PrstR05]
Recall preset 5, which becomes the
current configuration.
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Board-Specific Commands
The table that starts below shows commands that affect inputs only and, in general, apply
to installed input boards. Where a command does not apply to all input board types, the
valid board types are noted.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
EDID commands
NOTES:
•
•
See the table on the next two pages for X$ values.
Leading zeroes are optional for the entry of the inputs (X^s) and EDID values (X$s). Leading zeroes are reported in the response.
EAX^*X$EDID}
Assign EDID data to an input
Example (XTP CrossPoint 3200): EA7*36EDID}
Example (XTP CrossPoint 1600): EA7*36EDID}
Assign EDID data to all inputs
View EDID assignment
Save output 1 EDID to user
assigned slot
EA*X$*EDID}
EAX^EDID}
ESX$EDID]
EdidAX^*X$]
EdidA07*036]
EdidA07*036]
EdidA00*X$]
Assign an EDID value of X$ to input X^.
Assign an EDID value of 1280x720 at
60 Hz to input 7.
Assign an EDID value of 1600x900 at
60 Hz to input 7.
Assign an EDID value of X$ to all inputs.
X$]
EdidSX$]
Save the output 1 EDID to location X$.
NOTE: For this command, X$ is valid only in the range of 117 through 124 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) or 133 through 140
(XTP CrossPoint 3200).
Example (XTP CrossPoint 3200): ES133EDID}
Example (XTP CrossPoint 1600): ES117EDID}
KEY:
X! = Input number (for tie)
X@ = Output number
X# = Global preset number
X$ = EDID value (resolution and rate)
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
EdidS133]
EdidS117]
Save the output 1 EDID to user location 1.
Save the output 1 EDID to user location 1.
00 – 16 or 32 (00 = untied)
01 – 16 or 32
01 - 32
See the table on the next two pages.
01 – 16 or 32
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
88
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
89
047
048
049
050
051
052
053
063
064
065
066
067
068
069
023
018
039
017
033
034
022
007
007
021
006
006
038
005
005
037
004
004
019
003
003
020
002
002
036
001
001
035
1600
3200
X$
076
046
1280x800 @ 50 Hz
1280x800 @ 50 Hz
045
1280x768 @ 60 Hz
075
044
1280x768 @ 50 Hz
074
043
1280x720 @ 60 Hz
1280x768 @ 60 Hz
042
1280x720 @ 50 Hz
1280x768 @ 50 Hz
041
073
040
1024x768 @ 50 Hz
1024x768 @ 60 Hz
072
014
Output 7
1280x720 @ 60 Hz
013
Output 6
1280x720 @ 50 Hz
012
Output 5
071
011
Output 4
070
010
Output 3
1024x768 @ 50 Hz
009
Output 2
1024x768 @ 60 Hz
008
3200
Output 1
Source or value
X$
060
059
058
057
056
055
054
030
029
028
027
026
025
024
014
013
012
011
010
009
008
1600
1366x768 @ 60 Hz
1366x768 @ 50 Hz
1360x768 @ 60 Hz
1360x768 @ 50 Hz
1280x1024 @ 60 Hz
1280x1024 @ 50 Hz
1280x800 @ 60 Hz
1366x768 @ 60 Hz
1366x768 @ 50 Hz
1360x768 @ 60 Hz
1360x768 @ 50 Hz
1280x1024 @ 60 Hz
1280x1024 @ 50 Hz
1280x800 @ 60 Hz
Output 14
Output 13
Output 12
Output 11
Output 10
Output 9
Output 8
Source or value
1600
Source or value
083
082
081
080
079
078
077
053
052
051
050
049
048
047
021
020
019
018
017
016
015
Output 21
Output 20
Output 19
Output 18
Output 17
Output 16
Output 15
1400x1050 @ 50 Hz
1600x1200 @ 50 Hz
1600x900 @ 60 Hz
1600x900 @ 50 Hz
1440x900 @ 60 Hz
1440x900 @ 50 Hz
1400x1050 @ 60 Hz
067
066
065
064
063
062
061
1600x1200 @ 50 Hz
1600x900 @ 60 Hz
1600x900 @ 50 Hz
1440x900 @ 60 Hz
1440x900 @ 50 Hz
1400x1050 @ 60 Hz
1400x1050 @ 50 Hz
DVI – PC values
037
036
035
034
033
032
031
VGA – PC values
016
015
Assigned output values
3200
X$
090
089
088
087
086
085
084
060
059
058
057
056
055
054
028
027
026
025
024
023
022
3200
X$
074
073
072
071
070
069
068
044
043
042
041
040
039
038
1600
1920x1200 @ 60 Hz
1920x1200 @ 50 Hz
1920x1080 @ 60 Hz
1920x1080 @ 50 Hz
1680x1050 @ 60 Hz
1680x1050 @ 50 Hz
1600x1200 @ 60 Hz
1920x1200 @ 60 Hz
1920x1200 @ 50 Hz
1920x1080 @ 60 Hz
1920x1080 @ 50 Hz
1680x1050 @ 60 Hz
1680x1050 @ 50 Hz
1600x1200 @ 60 Hz
Output 28
Output 27
Output 26
Output 25
Output 24
Output 23
Output 22
Source or value
092
091
062
061
032
031
030
029
3200
X$
076
075
046
045
1600
2048x1080 @ 60 Hz
2048x1080 @ 50 Hz
2048x1080 @ 60 Hz
2048x1080 @ 50 Hz
Output 32
Output 31
Output 30
Output 29
Source or value
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
90
*
081
082
103
104
105
117
118
097
098
119
120
121
133
134
099
100
101
102
103
104
122*
123
124
135
136
1024x768 @ 60 Hz
1280x768 @ 50 Hz
1280x768 @ 60 Hz
1280x800 @ 50 Hz
1280x800 @ 60 Hz
480p @ 60 Hz
2-channel audio
576p @ 50 Hz
2-channel audio
720p @ 50 Hz
2-channel audio
User assigned 1
User assigned 2
3200
1024x768 @ 50 Hz
Source or value
Default value, digital
079
080
078
094
096
077
093
095
1600
X$
3200
X$
120
119
108
107
106*
088
087
086
085
084
083
1600
3200
X$
1600
Source or value
3200
X$
1600
User assigned 4
User assigned 3
720p @ 60 Hz
multi-channel audio
720p @ 50 Hz
multi-channel audio
720p @ 60 Hz
2-channel audio
1366x768 @ 60 Hz
1366x768 @ 50 Hz
1360x768 @ 60 Hz
1360x768 @ 50 Hz
1280x1024 @ 60 Hz
1280x1024 @ 50 Hz
1600x900 @ 60 Hz
1600x900 @ 50 Hz
1440x900 @ 60 Hz
1440x900 @ 50 Hz
1400x1050 @ 60 Hz
1400x1050 @ 50 Hz
111
110
109
1080i @ 50 Hz
multi-channel audio
1080i @ 60 Hz
2-channel audio
1080i @ 50 Hz
2-channel audio
HDMI – HDTV values
094
093
092
091
090
089
138
137
122
121
User assigned 6
User assigned 5
User – Assigned EDIDs
127
126
125
110
109
108
107
106
105
140
139
130
129
128
116
115
114
113
112
111
124
123
114
113
112
100
099
098
097
096
095
Source or value
User assigned 8
User assigned 7
1080p @ 60 Hz
2-channel audio
1080p@ 50 Hz
2-channel audio
1080i @ 60 Hz
multi-channel audio
1920x1200 @ 60 Hz
1920x1200 @ 50 Hz
1680x1050 @ 60 Hz
1680x1050 @ 50 Hz
1600x1200 @ 60 Hz
1600x1200 @ 50 Hz
HDMI – PC values, all with 2-channel embedded audio
Source or value
132
131
118
117
3200
X$
116
115
102
101
1600
1080p @ 60 Hz
multi-channel audio
1080p @ 50 Hz
multi-channel audio
2048x1080 @ 60 Hz
2048x1080 @ 50 Hz
Source or value
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
0LS
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
0LS
No input detected
Additional Description
Input sync detection
View all input connections
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the connection
status of an input, starting from input 1.
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 3200):
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
Inputs on XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA, XTP CP 4i DVI Pro,
XTP CP 4i 3G, XTP CP 4i VGA Boards
Audio input gain and attenuation
NOTE: The set gain (G) and set attenuation (g) commands are case sensitive.
Set audio input gain to +dB value
Example:
Set audio input attenuation to -dB
value
Increment gain
Example:
X^*X&G
InX^•AudX*]
1*2G
In01•Aud+02]
X^*X(g
InX^•AudX*]
X^+G
InX^•AudX*]
5+G
In05•Aud+03]
Decrement gain
Example:
X^–G
InX^•AudX*]
7–G
In07•Aud-09]
Read input gain
Example:
X^G
X*]
-06]
3G
Set input 1 audio gain to +2 dB.
Increase gain by 1 dB.
Increase audio input 5 level from +2 dB
to +3 dB.
Decrease gain by 1 dB.
Decrease audio input 7 level from -8 dB
to -9 dB.
Audio input 3 level is at -6 dB.
Inputs on XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA, XTP CP 4i DVI Pro, and
XTP CP 4i 3G Boards
Audio routing selections
NOTE: These commands select between the audio embedded in the digital video stream and the 2-channel analog audio.
Input audio selection
Example 1:
Example 2:
View input audio selection
View all input audio selections
EIX^*X1!AFMT}
EI1*1AFMT}
AfmtIX^*X1!]
AfmtI01*1]
EI1*0AFMT}
AfmtI01*0]
EIX^AFMT}
EIAFMT}
X1!]
X1!1X1!2X1!3 ... X1!n]
Use audio from the X1! source.
Use digital audio from the HDMI port of
input 1.
Auto (0): Digital audio takes priority over
analog audio.
16 or 32 (n) sequential audio input
selections, starting from input 1.
Inputs on XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA, and XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
Boards
Input reports as an HDCP-authorized device
HDCP authorized device on
EEX^*1HDCP}
HdcpEX^*1]
HDCP authorized device off
EEX^*0HDCP}
HdcpEX^*0]
View HDCP authorized status
EEX^HDCP}
X1@]
KEY:
X% = Input signal status
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X& = Audio gain
X* = Numeric dB value
X( = Audio attenuation
X1) = Resolution and rate for black screen
X1! = Input audio source
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
Set the input as an HDCP authorized
device (default).
Set the input as not an HDCP
authorized device.
Show HDCP authorized device status.
0 = No signal detected
1 = Sync detected
01 – 16 or 32
0 – 24 (1 dB per step)
–18 to +24 (43 steps of gain or attenuation) (0 dB = default)
1 – 18 (1 dB per step)
2 = 1280x720p @50 Hz
4 = 1280x720p @60 Hz
6 = 1920x1080p @60 Hz
0 = Auto (see the example above)
1 = HDMI (de-embedded digital audio) (default)
2 = Analog 2-channel audio
0 = off
1 = on (default)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
91
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Inputs on XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA, and XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
Boards (continued)
HDCP status
View input HDCP status
View HDCP status of all inputs
EIX^HDCP}
EIHDCP}
X1#]
X1#1X1#2X1#3... X1#n]
Inputs on XTP CP 4i [XTP], XTP CP 4i 4K [XTP], and XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K Boards
Captive screw and Ethernet serial port insertion enables
NOTE: See RS-232 Insertion on page 66 for an overview of using serial port insertions.
Enable an input captive screw serial
port insertion
EIX^*0LRPT}
LrptIX^*0]
Enable an input Ethernet serial port
insertion
EIX^*1LRPT}
LrptIX^*1]
Set all RS-232 input insertions
View input insertion
View all input insertions
EIX1$*LRPT}
EIX^LRPT}
EILRPT}
LrptI00*X1$]
X1$]
X1$1X1$2X1$3... X1$n]
Enable the captive screw serial port
insert on input X^. This disables the
Ethernet RS-232 insert.
Enable the Ethernet serial port insert
on input X^. This disables the captive
screw serial port insert.
One X1$ for each available (installed)
input, starting at input 1. Inputs that are
not on an XTP CP 4i [XTP], XTP CP 4i
4K [XTP], or XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K board
report as 0.
Ethernet serial port insert parameters
Set serial port parameters
EX1%*X1^,X1&,X1*,X1(CP}
Read serial port parameters
EX1%CP}
X1^,X1&,X1*,X1(]
Configure current port timeout
Read current port timeout
Configure global IP port timeout
Read global IP port timeout
Set UART starting point
E0*X2)TC}
E0TC}
E1*X2)TC}
E1TC}
EX2!MD}
Pti0*X2)]
Read UART starting point
EMD}
X2!]
CpnX1%•CcpX1^,X1&,X1*,X1(]
KEY:
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X1# = HDCP status (for inputs)
X2)]
Pti1*X2)]
X2)]
PmdX2!]
Sets the initial (lowest) port number for
the range of numbers assigned to the
serial port and UARTs.
01 — 16 or 32
0 = No source device connected
1 = Source connected is HDCP-compliant
2 = Source connected is not HDCP-compliant
0 = Captive screw RS-232 insert (default) 1 = Ethernet RS-232 insert (UART)
03 — 18 or 34 = UARTs (inputs) 1 — 16 or 32
300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 (default), 14400, 19200, 28800,
38400, 57600, 115200
X1$ = Captive screw or UART
X1% = Port number
X1^ = Baud rate
X1& = Parity
odd, even, none, mark, space (only the first letter is required) (n = default)
X1* = Data bits
7, 8 (default)
X1( = Stop bits
1 (default), 2
X2) = Port timeout (10-sec. increments) 1 (= 10 seconds) - 65000 (default is 30 = 300 seconds = 5 minutes)
X2! = UART starting point
The starting point (X2!) is the rear panel RS-232/RS-422 port.
The next position (X2!+1) is not used.
For the XTP CrossPoint 1600, X2!+2 through X2!+17 are XTP inputs.
For the XTP CrossPoint 3200, X2!+2 through X2!+33 are XTP inputs.
Default values: 1999 = Rear panel remote RS-232/RS-422 port
2000 is unused
2001 through 2016 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) = Input 1 through 16
2001 through 2032 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) = Input 1 through 32
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
92
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Inputs on XTP CP 4i [XTP] and XTP CP 4i 4K [XTP] Boards
XTP power
ATTENTION:
•
•
Power over XTP (PoX) is intended for indoors use only. No part of a network that uses PoX can be routed outdoors.
PoX est destiné à une utilisation en intérieur uniquement. Aucune partie d’un réseau qui utilise PoX ne peut être routée en extérieur.
NOTE:
•
•
PoX is supplied by the XTP CrossPoint 48 V power supply.
•
XTP CrossPoint 3200:
• Can power up to 24 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 312 watts.
• No 48 V power supply redundancy is available.
XTP CrossPoint 1600:
• Can power up to 28 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 364 watts.
• Is available with optional 48 V power supply redundancy.
Enable or disable power to input
endpoint and report status
Example:
View input power status
Enable or disable input power and
report status, all inputs
View input power status, all inputs
View XTP power usage
EIX^*X2@POEC}
PoecIX^*X2@*X2#*X2$]
Enable or disable (X2@) remote power to
input X^. The endpoint is requesting
X2# watts and the power status is X2$.
Enable remote power on input 1, which
is requesting 13 watts. The board is
providing power to the endpoint.
EI1*1POEC}
PoecI01*1*13*1]
EIX^POEC}
EIX2@*POEC}
X2@*X2#*X2$]
PoecI00*X2@1X2@2... X2@n] Each X2@ is the enable or disable status of
EIPOEC}
ETPOEC}
X2@1X2@2X2@3... X2@n]
X2%*X2^]
an input, starting at 1. n is 16 or 32.
Show PoX wattage applied and the
status of the 48 V power supply.
Inputs on XTP CP 4i 3G Boards
AES digital audio channel selection
NOTE: Eight-channel audio is divided into two groups, each
consisting of two channel pairs (four channels). The table at
right shows the channels contained within each group.
Group 1
Ch Pair 1
Ch 1
Ch 2
Select channel
EIX^*X2&AESC}
AescIX^*X2&]
View selected channel
EIX^AESC}
X2&]
AES digital audio group selection
EIX^*X2*AESG}
Select group
View selected group
KEY:
EIX^AESG}
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X2@ = Enable or disable for power
X2# = Amount of power requested
X2$ = Power status
X2% = Wattage
X2^ = Power supply status
X2& = AESC digital channel pair
X2* = AESG digital channel group
AesgIX^*X2*]
Group 2
Ch Pair 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch Pair 1
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch Pair 2
Ch 1
Ch 2
Select digital audio channel pair on
which audio will be embedded.
Select digital audio channel group on
which audio will be embedded.
X2*]
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Disable (default)
1 = Enable
00 or 13 (watts)
0 = Unpowered endpoint
2 = Power available, disabled
1 = Power provided to endpoint
3 = No power available, enabled
Power usage in 0.1 watt increments. Example: 260 = 26.0 watts
0 = Ok
1 = Not Ok
1 (default) or 2
1 (default) or 2
4 = Fault
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
93
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Inputs on XTP CP 4i VGA (Analog Video) Boards
Input video format
Set format
Example:
View format
X^*X2(\
ItypX^*X2(*X3)]
1*0\
Ityp01*0*5]
X^\
X2(*X3)]
EIX^*2AADJ}
AadjIX^*2]
Set input X^ to X2( video format. The
board reports the detected video
format, X3), in the response.
Set input 1 to auto. The board reports
RGB video.
View set (X2() and detected (X3)) video
format of input X^.
Image reset
Execute an image reset
Reset input signal timing to Extron
default for input X^.
Color
NOTE: Color adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite video
inputs.
Set a specific color value
Increment color value
Decrement color value
View the color value
EIX^*X3!COLR}
EIX^+COLR}
EIX^–COLR}
EIX^COLR}
ColrIX^*X3!]
Specify the color adjustment.
Increase the color setting by one.
Decrease the color setting by one.
Show the color setting.
ColrIX^*X3!]
ColrIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Tint
NOTE: Tint adjustments are available for NTSC S-video, and NTSC composite video inputs.
Set a specific tint value
Increment tint value
Decrement tint value
View the tint value
EIX^*X3!TINT}
EIX^+TINT}
EIX^–TINT}
EIX^TINT}
TintIX^*X3!]
TintIX^*X3!]
TintIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the tint adjustment.
Increase the tint setting by one.
Decrease the tint setting by one.
Show the tint setting.
Brightness
NOTE: Brightness adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite
video inputs.
Set a specific brightness value
Increment brightness value
Decrement brightness value
View the brightness value
EIX^*X3!BRIT}
EIX^+BRIT}
EIX^–BRIT}
EIX^BRIT}
BritIX^*X3!]
BritIX^*X3!]
BritIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the brightness adjustment.
Increase the brightness setting by one.
Decrease the brightness setting by one.
Show the brightness setting.
Contrast
NOTE: Contrast adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite
video inputs.
Set a specific contrast value
Increment contrast value
Decrement contrast value
View the contrast value
KEY:
EIX^*X3!CONT}
EIX^+CONT}
EIX^–CONT}
EIX^CONT}
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X2( = Input video source
X3) = Detected video format
X3! = Picture adjustments
ContIX^*X3!]
ContIX^*X3!]
ContIX^*X3!]
X3!]
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Auto (default)
1 = Video
2 = S-video
0 = no signal detected
1 = Video
2 = S-video
000 through 255 (128 = default)
Specify the contrast adjustment.
Increase the contrast setting by one.
Decrease the contrast setting by one.
Show the contrast setting.
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
94
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Inputs on XTP CP 4i VGA (Analog Video) Boards (continued)
Pixel phase
NOTE: Pixel phase adjustments are available for RGBHV and non-interlaced component video (YUVp) video inputs.
EIX^*X3!PHAS}
EIX^+PHAS}
EIX^–PHAS}
EIX^PHAS}
PhasIX^*X3!]
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
EIX^–HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Decrement value
EIX^+HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
View
EIX^HCTR}
X3@]
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
Decrement value
EIX^+VCTR}
EIX^–VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
View
EIX^VCTR}
X3@]
Set a specific pixel sampling phase
Increment sampling value
Decrement sampling value
View the sampling value
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the pixel sampling phase.
Increase the phase value.
Decrease the phase value.
Show the pixel sampling phase.
Horizontal shift
Set the horizontal location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one pixel (shift the
image to the right).
Decrease the value by one pixel (shift
the image to the left).
Show the horizontal location of first
active pixel in input X^.
Vertical shift
VctrIX^*X3@]
Set the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one line (shift up).
Decrease the value by one line (shift
down).
Show the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Save and recall analog input presets
NOTES:
•
Analog input presets are available for analog (RGB, YUVp, YUVi, S-video, composite) video input signals on an XTP CP 4i VGA
universal analog input board only.
•
Analog input presets save a set of analog variables, such as: horizontal and vertical shift, pixel phase, color and tint, brightness
and contrast, and input type.
Save an analog input preset
Recall an analog input preset
KEY:
X^*1*X3#,
X^*1*X3#.
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X3@ = Shift
X3# = Analog input preset
SprX^*1*X3#]
RprX^*1*X3#]
Command character is a comma.
Command character is a period.
01 – 16 or 32
00000 through 65535
1 through 8
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
95
SIS Command and Response Table for Input-Endpoint-Specific
Commands
The table that starts below shows commands that affect the following endpoints connected
through XTP input boards only.
• XTP T HDMI and XTP T HD 4K
• XTP T UWP 202 and XTP T UWP 202 4K
• XTP T USW 103 and XTP T USW 103 4K • XTP T UWP 302
• XTP T VGA
• XTP T EU 202
• XTP T HWP 101 and XTP HWP 101 4K
• XTP T MK 202
• XTP T FB 202 and XTP T FB 202 4K
• XTP FT HD 4K
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher acts as a master, forwarding the commands to
the endpoint slave.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
EDID commands
NOTE: Leading zeroes are optional for the entry of the inputs (X^s) and EDID values (X$s). Leading zeroes are reported in the response.
Assign EDID data to an input
Example (XTP CrossPoint 3200):
Example (XTP CrossPoint 1600):
Assign EDID data to all inputs
View EDID assignment
Save output 1 EDID to user
assigned slot
EAX^*X$EDID}
EA7*36EDID}
EdidAX^*X$]
EA7*36EDID}
EdidA07*036]
EA*X$*EDID}
EAX^EDID}
ESX$EDID}
EdidA00*X$]
EdidA07*036]
Assign an EDID value of X$ to input X^.
Assign an EDID value of 1280x720 at
60 Hz to input 7.
Assign an EDID value of 1600x900 at
60 Hz to input 7.
Assign an EDID value of X$ to all inputs.
X$]
EdidSX$]
Save the output 1 EDID to location X$.
NOTE: For this command, X$ is valid only in the range of 117 through 124 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) or 133 through 140
(XTP CrossPoint 3200).
Example (XTP CrossPoint 3200):
Example (XTP CrossPoint 1600):
ES133EDID}
ES117EDID}
EdidS133]
EdidS117]
Save the output 1 EDID to user location 1.
Save the output 1 EDID to user location 1.
Audio input gain and attenuation
NOTE: The set gain (G) and set attenuation (g) commands are case sensitive.
Set audio input gain to +dB value
Example:
Set audio input attenuation to -dB
value
Increment gain
Example:
X^*X&G
InX^•AudX*]
1*2G
In01•Aud+02]
X^*X(g
InX^•AudX*]
X^+G
InX^•AudX*]
5+G
In05•Aud+03]
Decrement gain
Example:
X^-G
InX^•AudX*]
7-G
In07•Aud-09]
Read input gain
Example:
X^G
X*]
-06]
KEY:
3G
X$ = EDID value (resolution and rate)
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X& = Audio gain
X* = Numeric dB value
X( = Audio attenuation
Set input 1 audio gain to +2 dB.
Increase gain by 1 dB.
Increase audio input 5 level from +2 dB
to +3 dB.
Decrease gain by 1 dB.
Decrease audio input 7 level from -8 dB
to -9 dB.
Audio input 3 level is at -6 dB.
See the table beginning on page 89.
01 – 16 or 32
0 – 24 (1 dB per step)
–18 to +24 (43 steps of gain or attenuation) (default = 0 dB)
1 – 18 (1 dB per step)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
96
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T HDMI , XTP T HD 4K, XTP T HWP 101, XTP T HWP 101 4K, and XTP FT HD 4K
transmitter commands
Audio routing selections
Input audio selection
Example 1:
Example 2:
View input audio selection
View all input audio selections
Enable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
Disable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
View black signal output status for
XTP T endpoint
EIX^*X1!AFMT}
EI1*1AFMT}
AfmtIX^*X1!]
AfmtI01*1]
EI1*0AFMT}
AfmtI01*0]
EIX^AFMT}
EIAFMT}
X1!]
X1!1X1!2X1!3 ... X1!n]
EEX^*1AFMT}
AfmtEX^*1]
EEX^*0AFMT}
AfmtEX^*0]
EEX^*AFMT}
X2@]
Use audio from the X1! source.
Use digital audio from the HDMI port of
input 1.
Auto (0): Digital audio takes priority over
analog audio.
16 or 32 (n) sequential audio input
selections, starting from input 1.
Enable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
Disable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
The black signal status of XTP
transmitter endpoint X^ is X2@.
Input reports as an HDCP-authorized device
HDCP authorized device on
EEX^*1HDCP}
HdcpEX^*1]
HDCP authorized device off
EEX^*0HDCP}
HdcpEX^*0]
View HDCP authorized status
EEX^HDCP}
X1@]
EIX^HDCP}
EI*HDCP}
X1#]
X1#1X1#2X1#3... X1#n]
0LS
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
Set the input as an HDCP authorized
device.
Set the input as not an HDCP
authorized device.
Show HDCP authorized device status.
HDCP status
View input HDCP status
View HDCP status of all inputs
Input sync detection
View all input connections
Example (XTP II CrossPoint
3200):
KEY:
0LS
No input detected
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
X% = Input signal status
0 = No signal detected
X^ = Input number (for other than tie) 01 – 16 or 32
X1! = Input audio source
0 = Auto (see the example above)
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
X1# = HDCP status (for inputs)
X2@ = Enable or disable
(for black video ties)
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the
connection status of an input, starting
from input 1.
1 = Signal detected
2 = Analog 2-channel audio
1 = HDMI (de-embedded digital audio) (default)
0 = off
1 = on (default)
0 = No source device connected
1 = Source connected is HDCP-compliant
2 = Source connected is not HDCP-compliant
0 = Disable
1 = Enable (default)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
97
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T USW 103 and XTP T USW 103 4K switcher commands
Select an endpoint switcher input
Select an input
EX^*X5%*3ETIE}
EtieX^*X5%video*X5%audio]
Show selected input
EX^ETIE}
X^*X5%video*X5%audio]
Select input X5% on input X^.
The two X5%s are always the same.
Input video format (available for endpoint input 1 only)
Set format
X^*X2(\
ItypX^*X2(*X3)]
Set input X^ to X2( video format. The
endpoint reports the detected video
format, X3), in the response.
Set input 1 to auto. RGB is detected.
Example:
View format
1*0\
Ityp01*0*5]
X^\
X2(*X3)]
View set (X2() and detected (X3)) video
format of input X^.
AadjT1*1*2]
Reset input 1 signal timing to default.
Image reset (available for endpoint input 1 only)
Execute an image reset
ETX^*1*2AADJ}
Pixel phase
NOTE: Pixel phase adjustments are available for RGBHV and non-interlaced component video (YUVp) video inputs.
Set a specific pixel sampling phase
Increment sampling value
Decrement sampling value
View the sampling value
EIX^*X3!PHAS}
EIX^+PHAS}
EIX^–PHAS}
EIX^PHAS}
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the pixel sampling phase.
Increase the phase value.
Decrease the phase value.
Show the pixel sampling phase.
Horizontal shift (available for endpoint input 1 only)
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
EIX^–HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Decrement value
EIX^+HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
View
EIX^HCTR}
X3@]
Set the horizontal location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one pixel (shift the
image to the right).
Decrease the value by one pixel (shift
the image to the left).
Show the horizontal location of first
active pixel in input X^.
Vertical shift (available for endpoint input 1 only)
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
Decrement value
View
EIX^+VCTR}
EIX^–VCTR}
EIX^VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
VctrIX^*X3@]
X3@]
Set the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one line (shift up).
Decrease the value by one line (shift down).
Show the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Save and recall analog input presets (available for endpoint input 1 only)
NOTES:
•
Analog input presets are available for analog (RGB, YUVp, YUVi, S-video, composite) video input signals on an XTP CP 4i VGA
universal analog input board only.
•
Analog input presets save a set of analog variables, such as: horizontal and vertical shift, pixel phase, color and tint, brightness
and contrast, and input type.
Save an analog input preset
Recall an analog input preset
KEY:
X^*1*X3#,
X^*1*X3#.
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X2( = Input video source
X3) = Detected video format
X3! = Picture adjustments
X3@ = Shift
X3# = Analog input preset
X5% = Transmitter endpoint input
SprX^*1*X3#]
RprX^*1*X3#]
Command character is a comma.
Command character is a period.
01 – 16 or 32 for an input
0 = Auto (default)
2 = S-video
1 = Video
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
0 = No signal detected 2 = S-video
1 = Video
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
000 through 255 (128 = default)
00000 through 65535
1 through 8
1-3 for the XTP T USW 103
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
98
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T USW 103 and XTP T USW 103 4K switcher commands (continued)
Audio routing selections
Enable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
Disable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
View black signal output status for
XTP T endpoint
EEX^*1AFMT}
AfmtEX^*1]
EEX^*0AFMT}
AfmtEX^*0]
EEX^*AFMT}
X2@]
Enable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
Disable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
The black signal status of XTP
transmitter endpoint X^ is X2@.
Input reports as an HDCP-authorized device
HDCP authorized device on
EEX^*1HDCP}
HdcpEX^*1]
HDCP authorized device off
EEX^*0HDCP}
HdcpEX^*0]
View HDCP authorized status
EEX^HDCP}
X1@]
EIX^HDCP}
EI*HDCP}
X1#]
X1#1X1#2X1#3... X1#n]
0LS
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
0LS
No input detected
Set the input as an HDCP authorized
device.
Set the input as not an HDCP
authorized device.
Show HDCP authorized device status.
HDCP status
View input HDCP status
View HDCP status of all inputs
Input sync detection
View all input connections
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the connection
status of an input, starting from input 1.
Example
(XTP II CrossPoint 3200):
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
XTP T VGA transmitter commands
Input video format
Set format
Example:
View format
X^*X2(\
ItypX^*X2(*X3)]
1*0\
Ityp01*0*5]
X^\
X2(*X3)]
ETX^*1*2AADJ}
AadjTX^*1*2]
Set input X^ to X2( video format. The
board reports the detected video
format, X3), in the response.
Set input 1 to auto. The board reports
RGB video.
View set (X2() and detected (X3)) video
format of input X^.
Image reset
Execute an image reset
KEY:
X% = Input signal status
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
X1# = HDCP status (for inputs)
X2@ = Enable or disable
(for black signal output)
X2( = Input video source
X3) = Detected video format
Reset input signal timing to Extron
default for input X^.
0 = No signal detected
1 = Sync detected
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Off
1 = On (default)
0 = No source device connected
1 = Source connected is HDCP-compliant
2 = Source connected is not HDCP-compliant
0 = Disable
1 = Enable (default)
0 = Auto (default)
1 = Video
2 = S-video
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
0 = no signal detected
1 = Video
2 = S-video
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
99
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T VGA transmitter commands (continued)
Color
NOTE: Color adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite video
inputs.
Set a specific color value
Increment color value
Decrement color value
View the color value
EIX^*X3!COLR}
EIX^+COLR}
EIX^–COLR}
EIX^COLR}
ColrIX^*X3!]
ColrIX^*X3!]
ColrIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the color adjustment.
Increase the color setting by one.
Decrease the color setting by one.
Show the color setting.
Tint
NOTE: Tint adjustments are available for NTSC S-video, and NTSC composite video inputs.
Set a specific tint value
Increment tint value
Decrement tint value
View the tint value
EIX^*X3!TINT}
EIX^+TINT}
EIX^–TINT}
EIX^TINT}
TintIX^*X3!]
TintIX^*X3!]
TintIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the tint adjustment.
Increase the tint setting by one.
Decrease the tint setting by one.
Show the tint setting.
Brightness
NOTE: Brightness adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite
video inputs.
Set a specific brightness value
Increment brightness value
Decrement brightness value
View the brightness value
EIX^*X3!BRIT}
EIX^+BRIT}
EIX^–BRIT}
EIX^BRIT}
BritIX^*X3!]
BritIX^*X3!]
BritIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the brightness adjustment.
Increase the brightness setting by one.
Decrease the brightness setting by one.
Show the brightness setting.
Contrast
NOTE: Contrast adjustments are available for RGBcvS (SCART), interlaced component video (YUVi), S-video, and NTSC composite
video inputs.
Set a specific contrast value
Increment contrast value
Decrement contrast value
View the contrast value
EIX^*X3!CONT}
EIX^+CONT}
EIX^–CONT}
EIX^CONT}
ContIX^*X3!]
ContIX^*X3!]
ContIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the contrast adjustment.
Increase the contrast setting by one.
Decrease the contrast setting by one.
Show the contrast setting.
Pixel phase
NOTE: Pixel phase adjustments are available for RGBHV and non-interlaced component video (YUVp) video inputs.
Set a specific pixel sampling phase
Increment sampling value
Decrement sampling value
View the sampling value
KEY:
EIX^*X3!PHAS}
EIX^+PHAS}
EIX^–PHAS}
EIX^PHAS}
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X3! = Picture adjustments
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the pixel sampling phase.
Increase the phase value.
Decrease the phase value.
Show the pixel sampling phase.
01 – 16 or 32
000 through 255 (128 = default)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
100
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T VGA transmitter commands (continued)
Horizontal shift
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
EIX^–HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Decrement value
EIX^+HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
View
EIX^HCTR}
X3@]
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
Decrement value
View
EIX^+VCTR}
EIX^–VCTR}
EIX^VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
Set the horizontal location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one pixel (shift the
image to the right).
Decrease the value by one pixel (shift
the image to the left).
Show the horizontal location of first
active pixel in input X^.
Vertical shift
VctrIX^*X3@]
X3@]
Set the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one line (shift up).
Decrease the value by one line (shift down).
Show the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Save and recall analog input presets
NOTES:
•
Analog input presets are available for analog (RGB, YUVp, YUVi, S-video, composite) video input signals on an XTP CP 4i VGA
universal analog input board only.
•
Analog input presets save a set of analog variables, such as: horizontal and vertical shift, pixel phase, color and tint, brightness
and contrast, and input type.
Save an analog input preset
Recall an analog input preset
X^*1*X3#,
X^*1*X3#.
SprX^*1*X3#]
RprX^*1*X3#]
Command character is a comma.
Command character is a period.
0LS
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the connection
0LS
No input detected
Input sync detection
View all input connections
status of an input, starting from input 1.
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 3200):
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
XTP T FB 202, XTP T FB 202 4K, XTP T UWP 202, XTP T UWP 202 4K, XTP T UWP 302,
XTP T EU 202, and XTP T MK 202 switcher commands
Audio routing selections
Enable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
Disable black signal for XTP T
endpoint
View black signal output status for
XTP T endpoint
EEX^*1AFMT}
AfmtEX^*1]
EEX^*0AFMT}
AfmtEX^*0]
EEX^*AFMT}
X2@]
Enable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
Disable an audio only tie for the
connected XTP transmitter.
The black signal status of XTP
transmitter endpoint X^ is X2@.
Input reports as an HDCP-authorized device
HDCP authorized device on
HDCP authorized device off
EEX^*1HDCP}
EEX^*0HDCP}
HdcpEX^*1]
View HDCP authorized status
EEX^HDCP}
X1@]
KEY:
X% = Input signal status
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
X2@ = Enable or disable black video ties
X3@ = Shift
X3# = Analog input preset
HdcpEX^*0]
0 = No signal detected
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Off
0 = Disable
0 through 65535
1 through 8
Set the input as an HDCP authorized device.
Set the input as not an HDCP
authorized device.
Show HDCP authorized device status.
1 = Sync detected
1 = On (default)
1 = Enable
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
101
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP T FB 202, XTP T FB 202 4K, XTP T UWP 202, XTP T UWP 202 4K, and XTP T UWP 302
switcher commands (continued)
HDCP status
View input HDCP status
View HDCP status of all inputs
EIX^HDCP}
EI*HDCP}
X1#]
X1#1X1#2X1#3... X1#n]
X^*X2(\
ItypX^*X2(*X3)]
1*0\
Ityp01*0*5]
X^\
X2(*X3)]
ETX^*1*2AADJ}
AadjTX^*1*2]
Input video format
Set format
Example:
View format
Set input X^ to X2( video format. The
endpoint reports the detected video
format, X3), in the response.
Set input 1 to auto. The endpoint
reports RGB video.
View set (X2() and detected (X3)) video
format of input X^.
Image reset
Execute an image reset
Reset input signal timing to Extron
default for input X^, sub-input 1.
Pixel phase (available for RGBHV and non-interlaced component video (YUVp) video inputs)
EIX^*X3!PHAS}
EIX^+PHAS}
EIX^–PHAS}
EIX^PHAS}
PhasIX^*X3!]
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
EIX^–HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
Decrement value
EIX^+HCTR}
HctrIX^*X3@]
View
EIX^HCTR}
X3@]
Specify a value
EIX^*X3@VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
Increment value
Decrement value
View
EIX^+VCTR}
EIX^–VCTR}
EIX^VCTR}
VctrIX^*X3@]
0LS
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
Set a specific pixel sampling phase
Increment sampling value
Decrement sampling value
View the sampling value
PhasIX^*X3!]
PhasIX^*X3!]
X3!]
Specify the pixel sampling phase.
Increase the phase value.
Decrease the phase value.
Show the pixel sampling phase.
Horizontal shift
Set the horizontal location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one pixel (shift the
image to the right).
Decrease the value by one pixel (shift
the image to the left).
Show the horizontal location of first
active pixel in input X^.
Vertical shift
VctrIX^*X3@]
X3@]
Set the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Increase the value by one line (shift up).
Decrease the value by one line (shift down).
Show the vertical location of first active
pixel in input X^.
Input sync detection
View all input connections
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the
connection status of an input, starting
from input 1.
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 3200):
KEY:
0LS
X% = Input signal status
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X1@ = HDCP authorized device
X1# = HDCP status (for inputs)
X2( = Input video source
X3) = Detected video format
X3! = Picture adjustments
X3@ = Shift
No input detected
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
0 = No signal detected
1 = Sync detected
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Off
1 = On (default)
0 = No source device connected
2 = Source connected is not HDCP-compliant
1 = Source connected is HDCP-compliant
0 = Auto (default)
1 = Video
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
5 = RGB
2 = S-video
4 = YUV interlace
6 = YUV
0 = no signal detected
1 = Video
2 = S-video
000 through 255 (128 = default)
00000 through 65535
3 = RGBcvS (SCART)
4 = YUV interlace
5 = RGB
6 = YUV
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
102
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Board-Specific
Commands
The table that starts below shows commands that affect outputs only and, in general, apply
to installed output boards. Where a command does not apply to all output board types, the
valid board types are noted.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Outputs on XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4o HDMI, and XTP CP 4o DVI Pro Boards
Audio routing selections
NOTE: These commands select between the audio embedded in the digital video stream and the 2-channel analog audio.
EOX@*X3$AFMT}
AfmtOX@*X3$]
EO3*0AFMT}
AfmtO03*0]
EOX@AFMT}
X3$]
EOAFMT}
X3$1X3$2X3$3 ... X3$n]
EBX@*1AFMT}
AfmtBX@*1]
EBX@*0AFMT}
AfmtBX@*0]
EBX@AFMT}
EB1*AFMT}
X2@]
EB0*AFMT}
AfmtB0]
EOX@HDCP}
EO*HDCP}
X3%]
X3%1X3%2X3%3... X3%n]
Video mute
Video unmute
Read video mute
X@*1B
X@*0B
X@B
VmtX@*1]
Global video mute
Global video unmute
1*B
Vmt1]
0*B
Vmt0]
Output audio HDMI select
Example:
View output audio breakaway
selection
View output audio breakaway
selection, all outputs
Enable black signal output for audio
only tie
Disable black signal output for audio
only tie
View black signal output status
Enable black signal for all audio
only ties
Disable black signal for all audio
only ties
AfmtB1]
When audio is broken away from video,
embed audio from the X3$ source in the
video output.
When audio is broken away from video,
use the embedded audio from the input
port when creating an audio breakaway tie
to output 3.
16 or 32 (n) sequential audio output
selections, starting from output 1.
Enable black signal in audio only tie to
output X@.
Disable black signal in audio only tie to
output X@.
The black signal status of output X@ is X2@.
Enable black signal in audio only tie to all
outputs.
Disable black signal in audio only tie to all
outputs.
HDCP status
View output HDCP status
View HDCP status of all outputs
Video mutes (local)
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X2@ = Enable, disable (for black video and mutes, see above)
X3$ = Output audio source
X3% = HDCP status (for outputs)
VmtX@*0]
X2@]
Mute output X@ video (video off).
Unmute output X@ video (video on).
X2@ = 1 = enable (muted)
0 = disable (unmuted) (default).
Mute all video outputs.
Unmute all video outputs.
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Original HDMI audio
1 = Embed audio (default)
0, 2, 4, or 6 = No monitor connected
1, 3, or 5 = Monitor connected but the video signal is not encrypted
7 = Monitor connected and the video signal is encrypted
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
103
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Outputs on XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4o HDMI, XTP CP 4o DVI Pro, and XTP CP 4o SA Boards
Audio output volume
NOTE: The table below the commands defines the value of each audio volume step.
Set a specific audio volume
Example:
Increment volume
Example:
Decrement volume
Read output volume
X@*X3^V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1*50v
Out01•Vol50]
X@+V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1+V
Out01•Vol51]
X@–V
X@V
OutX@•VolX3^]
Volume setting for output 1 is 50 (79)%.
Increment volume by 1 step.
Decrease volume by 1 step.
X3^]
Audio Output Volume Table
dB of
X3^
Value Attenuation
Output
Volume
dB of
X3^
Value Attenuation
Output
Volume
dB of
X3^
Value Attenuation
Output
Volume
00
76
0
01
63
5.5%
23
41
38.5%
45
19
71.5%
02
62
7%
24
40
40%
46
18
73%
03
61
8.5%
25
39
41.5%
47
17
74.5%
04
60
10%
26
38
43%
48
16
76%
05
59
11.5%
27
37
44.5%
49
15
77.5%
06
58
13%
28
36
46%
50
14
79%
07
57
14.5%
29
35
47.5%
51
13
80.5%
08
56
16%
30
34
49%
52
12
82%
09
55
17.5%
31
33
50.5%
53
11
83.5%
10
54
19%
32
32
52%
54
10
85%
11
53
20.5%
33
31
53.5%
55
9
86.5%
12
52
22%
34
30
55%
56
8
88%
13
51
23.5%
37
27
59.5%
57
7
89.5%
14
50
25%
36
28
58%
58
6
91%
15
49
26.5%
37
27
59.5%
59
5
92.5%
16
48
28%
38
26
61%
60
4
94%
17
47
29.5%
39
25
62.5%
61
3
95.5%
18
46
31%
40
24
64%
62
2
97%
19
45
32.5%
41
23
65.5%
63
1
98.5%
20
44
34%
42
22
67%
64*
0
100%
21
43
35.5%
43
21
68.5%
22
42
37%
44
20
70%
*Default value
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X3^ = Volume
01 – 16 or 32
00 – 64 (1 dB per step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB) (see the table above).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
104
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Outputs on XTP CP 4o HDMI, XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4o DVI Pro,and XTP CP 4o SA Boards (cont)
Audio mutes (local)
Mute digital audio
Mute analog audio
Mute digital and analog audio
Unmute both audio
View audio mute status
Global digital audio mute
Global analog audio mute
Global digital and audio mute
Global audio unmute
X@*1Z
X@*2Z
X@*3Z
X@*0Z
X@Z
AmtX@*1]
0*Z
AmtX@*2]
AmtX@*3]
AmtX@*0]
X3&]
Amt1]
Amt2]
Amt3]
Amt0]
EVM}
X3*1X3*2 ... X3*n]
1*Z
2*Z
3*Z
Mute output X@ digital audio (audio off).
Mute output X@ analog audio (audio off).
Unmute output X@ audio (audio on).
Mute all digital audio outputs.
Mute all analog audio outputs.
Mute all digital and audio outputs.
Unmute all audio outputs.
View video and audio mutes
View local output mutes
Example :
(XTP II CrossPoint 3200)
EVM}
Mut02201000000000000000000003000000]
Each X3* response is the mute status of
an output, starting from 1. n = 16 or 32.
Digital audio is muted on outputs 2 and 3,
video on output 5, and video and audio on
output 26. All other outputs are unmuted.
NOTE: The Mut portion of the response is only present in verbose modes 2 and 3.
Outputs on XTP CP 4o [XTP], XTP CP 4o 4K [XTP], and XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K Boards
Captive screw and Ethernet serial port insertion enables
NOTE: See RS-232 Insertion on page 66 for an overview of using serial port insertions.
Enable an output captive screw
serial port insertion
EOX@*0LRPT}
LrptOX@*0]
Enable an output Ethernet serial
port insertion
EOX@*1LRPT}
LrptOX@*1]
Set all RS-232 output insertions
View RS-232 output insertion
View all output insertions
EOX1$*LRPT}
EOX@LRPT}
EOLRPT}
LrptO00*X1$]
X1$]
X1$1X1$2X1$3... X1$n]
Enable the captive screw serial port
insert on output X@. This disables the
Ethernet serial port insert.
Enable the Ethernet serial port insert
on output X@. This disables the captive
screw serial port insert.
One X1$ for each available (installed)
output, starting at output 1. Outputs that
are not on an XTP CP 4o [XTP], XTP CP 4o
4K [XTP], or XTP CP 4o Fiber Plus board
report as 0.
Ethernet serial port insert parameters
Set serial port parameters
EX1%*X1^,X1&,X1*,X1(CP}
Read serial port parameters
EX1%CP}
CpnX1%•CcpX1^,X1&,X1*,X1(]
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X1$ = Captive screw or UART
X1% = Port number
X1^ = Baud rate
X1& = Parity
X1* = Data bits
X1( = Stop bits
X3& = Digital and analog audio mute status
X3* = Video and audio mute status
X1^,X1&,X1*,X1(]
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Captive screw RS-232 insert (default)
1 = Ethernet RS-232 insert (UART)
35 — 50 = UART (outputs) 1 — 16 (XTP CrossPoint 1600)
35 — 66 = UART (outputs) 1 — 32 (XTP CrossPoint 3200)
300, 600, 1200, 1800, 2400, 3600, 4800, 7200, 9600 (default), 14400, 19200,
28800, 38400, 57600, 115200
odd, even, none, mark, space (only the first letter is required) (n = default)
7, 8 (default)
1 (default), 2
0 = No mutes
2 = Analog audio mute
1 = Digital audio mute
3 = Digital and analog audio mute
0 = No mutes
4 = Analog audio mute
1 = Video mute
5 = Video and analog audio mute
2 = Digital audio mute
6 = Digital and analog audio mute
3 = Video and digital audio mute
7 = Video, digital audio, and analog audio mute
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
105
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Outputs on XTP CP 4o [XTP], XTP CP 4o 4K [XTP], and XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K Boards (continued)
Ethernet serial port insert parameters (continued)
EX2!MD}
Set UART starting point
PmdX2!]
Sets the initial (lowest) port number for the
range of numbers assigned to the serial
port and UARTs.
NOTE: Output insert port 1 is 32 positions from X2! for both 1600 and 3200 matrix sizes.
EMD}
Read UART starting point
X2!]
Outputs on XTP CP 4o [XTP] and XTP CP 4o 4K [XTP] Boards
XTP power
ATTENTION:
•
•
Power over XTP (PoX) is intended for indoors use only. No part of a network that uses PoX can be routed outdoors.
PoX est destiné à une utilisation en intérieur uniquement. Aucune partie d’un réseau qui utilise PoX ne peut être routée en extérieur.
NOTES:
•
•
•
PoX is supplied by the matrix switcher 48 V power supply.
XTP CrossPoint 1600:
• Can power up to 28 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 364 watts.
• Is available with optional 48 V power supply redundancy.
XTP CrossPoint 3200:
• Can power up to 24 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 312 watts.
• No 48 V power supply redundancy is available.
Enable or disable power to output
endpoint and report status
EOX@*X2@POEC}
PoecOX@*X2@*X2#*X2$]
View output power status
Enable or disable output power and
report status, all outputs
View all output power status
View XTP power usage
EOX@POEC}
EOX2@*POEC}
X2@*X2#*X2$]
PoecO00*X2@1X2@2... X2@n] Each X2@ is the enable or disable status of
EOPOEC}
ETPOEC}
X2@1X2@2X2@3... X2@n]
X2%*X2^]
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X2! = UART starting point
Enable or disable (X2@) remote power on
output X@. The endpoint is requesting
X2# watts and the power status is X2$.
an output, starting at 1. n is 16 or 32.
Show PoX wattage applied and the
status of the 48 V power supply.
01 – 16 or 32
The starting point (X2!) is the rear panel RS-232/RS-422 port.
The next position (X2!+1) is not used.
For the XTP CrossPoint 1600, X2!+2 through X2!+17 are XTP inputs.
For the XTP CrossPoint 3200, X2!+2 through X2!+33 are XTP inputs.
For the XTP CrossPoint 1600 — X2!+18 through X2!+34 are XTP outputs.
For the XTP CrossPoint 3200 — X2!+34 through X2!+65 are XTP outputs.
Default values: 1999 = Rear panel remote RS-232/RS-422 port
2001 through 2016 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) = Inputs
2001 through 2032 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) = Inputs
2033 through 2048 (XTP CrossPoint 1600) = Output 1 through 16
2033 through 2064 (XTP CrossPoint 3200) = Output 1 through 32
X2@ = Enable or disable for power
0 = Disable (default)
1 = Enable
X2# = Amount of power requested
00 or 13 (watts)
X2$ = Power status
0 = Unpowered endpoint
2 = Power available but disabled
4 = Fault
1 = Power provided to endpoint
3 = No power available, but enabled
X2% = Wattage
Power usage in 0.1 watt increments. Example: 260 = 26.0 watts
X2^ = Power supply status
0 = Ok
1 = Not Ok
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
106
SIS Command and Response Table for Output-Endpoint-Specific
Commands
The table that starts below shows commands that affect XTP R HDMI, XTP R HD 4K,
XTP R HWP 201, XTP R HWP 201 4K, XTP SR HDMI, XTP SR HD 4K, XTP FR HD 4K, and
XTP SFR HD 4K endpoints connected through an XTP board only. The XTP CrossPoint
Series matrix switcher acts as a master, forwarding the commands to the endpoint slave.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP R HDMI, XTP R HD 4K, XTP R HWP 201, XTP R HWP 201 4K, XTP FR HD 4K,
and XTP SFR HD 4K receiver commands
Video mutes
Video mute
Video unmute
Read video mute
X@*1B
X@*0B
X@B
VmtX@*1]
Global video mute
Global video unmute
1*B
Vmt1]
0*B
Vmt0]
VmtX@*0]
X2@]
Mute output X@ video (video off).
Unmute output X@ video (video on).
X2@ = 1 = enable (muted)
0 = disable (unmuted) (default).
Mute all video outputs.
Unmute all video outputs.
Audio routing selections
NOTES:
•
•
These commands select between the audio embedded in the digital video stream and the 2-channel analog audio.
These commands are valid only if audio breakaway switching is performed (see the Create Ties commands on page 87).
Output audio HDMI select
Example:
View output audio breakaway
selection
View output audio breakaway
selection, all outputs
EOX@*X3$AFMT}
AfmtOX@*X3$]
EO3*0AFMT}
AfmtO03*0]
EOX@AFMT}
X3$]
EOAFMT}
X3$1X3$2X3$3 ... X3$n]
When audio is broken away from video,
embed audio from the X3$ source in the
video output.
When audio is broken away from video,
use the embedded audio from the input
port when creating an audio breakaway
tie to output 3.
16 or 32 (n) sequential audio output
selections, starting from output 1.
Audio output volume
Set the audio volume to a specific
value
Example:
Increment volume
Example:
Decrement volume
Read output volume
X@*X3^V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1*50v
Out01•Vol50]
X@+V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1+V
Out01•Vol51]
X@-V
X@V
OutX@•VolX3^]
X@*1Z
X@*2Z
X@*3Z
X@*0Z
X@Z
AmtX@*1]
Set output 1 volume to 79%.
Increment volume by 1 step.
Decrease volume by 1 step.
X3^]
Audio mutes
Mute digital audio
Mute analog audio
Mute digital and analog audio
Unmute both audio
View audio mute status
Global digital audio mute
Global analog audio mute
Global digital and analog audio mute
Global audio unmute
KEY:
1*Z
2*Z
3*Z
0*Z
X@ = Output number
X2@ = Enable and disable for mutes
X3$ = Output audio source
X3^ = Volume
X3& = Digital and analog audio mute status
AmtX@*2]
Mute output X@ digital audio (audio off).
Mute output X@ analog audio (audio off).
AmtX@*3]
AmtX@*0]
Unmute output X@ audio (audio on).
X3&]
Amt1]
Amt2]
Amt3]
Amt0]
Mute all audio digital outputs.
Mute all analog audio outputs.
Mute all digital and analog audio outputs.
Unmute all audio outputs.
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Original HDMI audio
1 = Embed audio (default)
00 – 64 (1 dB per step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB) (see the table on page 104)
0 = No mutes
2 = Analog audio mute
1 = Digital audio mute
3 = Analog and digital audio mute
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
107
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP R HDMI, XTP R HD 4K, and XTP FR HD 4K receiver commands (continued)
HDCP status
EOX@HDCP}
EOHDCP}
X3%]
X3%1X3%2X3%3... X3%n]
Turn on an endpoint relay
Turn off an endpoint relay
Toggle an endpoint relay
EX@*X3(*1RELY}
EX@*X3(*0RELY}
EX@*X3(*2RELY}
RelyX@*X3(*1]
Pulse an endpoint relay
EX@*X3(*3*X4)RELY}
RelyX@*X3(*3]
E1*2*3*45RELY}
Rely1*2*3]
EX@*X3(RELY}
X4!]
EVM}
X3*1X3*2 ... X3*n]
View output HDCP status
View HDCP status of all outputs
n = either 16 or 32
Relay controls
Example:
View an endpoint relay status
RelyX@*X3(*0]
RelyX@*X3(*X4!]
Turn on relay X3( in output X@.
Turn off relay X3( in output X@.
Toggle (on-to-off or off-to-on) relay X3(
in output X@.
Turn on relay X3( in output X@ for an
interval defined as X4). Each step of
X4) is 16 ms.
Turn on relay 2 in output endpoint 1 for
720 ms
(0.72 sec, X4) = 45 * 16 ms = 720 ms).
On or off.
View video and audio mutes
View output mutes
Example :
(XTP CrossPoint 3200)
EVM}
Each X3* response is the mute status of
an output, starting from output 1.
n = either 16 or 32.
Digital audio is muted on outputs 2 and
02201000000000000000000003000000] 3, video on output 5, and video and
digital audio on output 26. All other
outputs are unmuted.
XTP SR HDMI, XTP SR HD 4K, and XTP SFR HD 4K scaler commands
Video mutes
Video mute
Video unmute
Read video mute
X@*1B
X@*0B
X@B
VmtX@*1]
Global video mute
Global video unmute
1*B
Vmt1]
0*B
Vmt0]
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X2@ = Enable and disable for mutes
X3% = HDCP status (for outputs)
X3& = Digital and analog audio mute status
X3* = Video and audio mute status
X3( = Relay on endpoint
X4) = Pulse duration
X4! = Relay status
VmtX@*0]
X2@]
Mute output X@ video (video off).
Unmute output X@ video (video on).
X2@ = 1 = enable (muted)
0 = disable (unmuted) (default).
Mute all video outputs.
Unmute all video outputs.
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0, 2, 4, or 6 = No monitor connected
1, 3, or 5 = Monitor connected but the video signal is not encrypted
7 = Monitor connected and the video signal is encrypted
0 = No mutes
2 = Analog audio mute
1 = Digital audio mute
3 = Digital and analog audio mute
0 = No mutes
4 = Analog audio mute
1 = Video mute
5 = Video and analog audio mute
2 = Digital audio mute
6 = Digital and analog audio mute
3 = Video and digital audio mute
7 = Video, digital audio, and analog audio mute
1 or 2
0 through 65535 (each step = 16 ms, see the example above)
0 = Off
1 = On
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
108
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP SR HDMI, XTP SR HD 4K, and XTP SFR HD 4K scaler commands (continued)
Audio routing selections
NOTES:
•
•
These commands select between the audio embedded in the digital video stream and the 2-channel analog audio.
These commands are valid only if audio breakaway switching is performed (see the Create Ties commands on page 87).
Output audio HDMI select
Example:
View output audio breakaway
selection
View output audio breakaway
selection, all outputs
EOX@*X3$AFMT}
AfmtOX@*X3$]
EO3*0AFMT}
AfmtO03*0]
EOX@AFMT}
X3$]
EOAFMT}
X3$1X3$2X3$3 ... X3$n]
When audio is broken away from video,
embed audio from the X3$ source in the
video output.
When audio is broken away from video,
use the embedded audio from the input
port when creating an audio breakaway
tie to output 3.
16 or 32 (n) sequential audio output
selections, starting from output 1.
Audio output volume
Set the audio volume to a specific
value
Example:
Increment volume
Example:
Decrement volume
Read output volume
X@*X3^V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1*50v
Out01•Vol50]
X@+V
OutX@•VolX3^]
1+V
Out01•Vol51]
X@-V
X@V
OutX@•VolX3^]
X@*1Z
X@*2Z
X@*3Z
X@*0Z
X@Z
AmtX@*1]
Set output 1 volume to 79%.
Increment volume by 1 step.
Decrease volume by 1 step.
X3^]
Audio mutes
Mute digital audio
Mute analog audio
Mute digital and analog audio
Unmute both audio
View audio mute status
Global digital audio mute
Global analog audio mute
Global digital and audio mute
Global audio unmute
AmtX@*2]
Mute output X@ digital audio (audio off).
Mute output X@ analog audio (audio off).
AmtX@*3]
AmtX@*0]
Unmute output X@ audio (audio on).
0*Z
X3&]
Amt1]
Amt2]
Amt3]
Amt0]
Mute all digital audio outputs.
Mute all analog audio outputs.
Mute all digital and and audio outputs.
Unmute all audio outputs.
EOX@HDCP}
EOHDCP}
X3%]
X3%1X3%2X3%3... X3%n]
1*Z
2*Z
3*Z
HDCP status
View output HDCP status
View HDCP status of all outputs
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X2@ = Enable and disable for mutes
X3$ = Output audio source
X3% = HDCP status (for outputs)
01 – 16 or 32
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
0 = Original HDMI audio
1 = Embed audio (default)
0, 2, 4, or 6 = No monitor connected
1, 3, or 5 = Monitor connected but the video signal is not encrypted
7 = Monitor connected and the video signal is encrypted
X3^ = Volume
X3& = Digital and analog audio mute status
00 – 64 (1 dB per step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB) (see the table on page 104)
0 = No mutes
2 = Analog audio mute
1 = Digital audio mute
3 = Digital and analog audio mute
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
109
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit to Endpoint)
(Endpoint to Unit to Host)
Additional Description
XTP SR HDMI, XTP SR HD 4K, and XTP SFR HD 4K scaler commands (continued)
Relay controls
Turn on an endpoint relay
Turn off an endpoint relay
Toggle an endpoint relay
EX@*X3(*1RELY}
EX@*X3(*0RELY}
EX@*X3(*2RELY}
RelyX@*X3(*1]
Pulse an endpoint relay
EX@*X3(*3*X4)RELY}
RelyX@*X3(*3]
E1*2*3*45RELY}
Rely1*2*3]
EX@*X3(RELY}
X4!]
EVM}
X3*1X3*2 ... X3*n]
Example:
View an endpoint relay status
RelyX@*X3(*0]
RelyX@*X3(*X4!]
Turn on relay X3( in output X@.
Turn off relay X3( in output X@.
Toggle (on-to-off or off-to-on) relay X3(
in output X@.
Turn on relay X3( in output X@ for an
interval defined as X4). Each step of
X4) is 16 ms.
Turn on relay 2 in output endpoint 1 for
720 ms
(0.72 sec, X4) = 45 * 16 ms = 720 ms).
On or off.
View video and audio mutes
View output mutes
Example :
(XTP CrossPoint 3200)
KEY:
EVM}
X@ = Output number
X3* = Video and audio mute status
X3( = Relay on endpoint
X4) = Pulse duration
X4! = Relay status
02201000000000000000000003000000]
Each X3* response is the mute status of
an output, starting from 1.
n = is 16 or 32.
Digital audio is muted on outputs 2 and
3, video on output 5, and video and
digital audio on output 26. All other
outputs are unmuted.
01 – 16 or 32
0 = No mutes
4 = Analog audio mute
1 = Video mute
5 = Video and analog audio mute
2 = Digital audio mute
6 = Digital and analog audio mute
3 = Video and digital audio mute
7 = Video, digital audio, and analog audio mute
1 or 2
0 through 65535 (each step = 16 ms, see the example above)
0 = Off
1 = On
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
110
SIS Command and Response Table for Advanced Matrix Switcher Commands
The table that starts below shows commands for advanced operation of the XTP CrossPoint Series
matrix switcher frame. Commands shown affect the entire matrix switcher, regardless of the input
boards and output boards installed or any connected endpoints.
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Black video resolution within the matrix switcher for audio-breakaway ties
Set black signal resolution for the
inputs — XTP CrossPoint 1600
Set black signal resolution for the
inputs — XTP CrossPoint 3200
View black signal resolution for the
inputs — XTP CrossPoint 1600
View black signal resolution for the
inputs — XTP CrossPoint 3200
EA17*X1)AFMT}
AfmtA17*X1)]
EA33*X1)AFMT}
AfmtA33*X1)]
EA17AFMT}
X1)]
EA33AFMT}
X1)]
Set the black video signal resolution for
the matrix switcher.
Set the black video signal resolution for
the matrix switcher.
Video and audio test patterns
NOTES:
•
The test pattern (TEST) commands send test patterns to all outputs for setup and calibration. This is separate from the black video
signal insertion into audio breakaway ties (EBAFMT command on page 103 and the EEAFMT commands on page 97 and
page 99).
•
The available audio test pattern is a 1-kHz audio tone.
Output test pattern on all outputs
Disable test pattern
View test pattern status
EX4@TEST}
E0TEST}
ETEST}
TstX4@]
Output the selected test pattern.
Normal operation, test pattern disabled.
Tst00]
X4@]
Names
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see Special Characters on page 120).
Write global preset name
Example:
Read global preset name
Write input name
Example:
Read input name
Write output name
Example:
Read output name
EX#,X4#NG}
E1,Security 1NG}
EX#NG}
NmgX#,X4#]
EX^,X4#NI}
NmiX^,X4#]
E1,Podium camNI}
EX^NI}
Nmi01,Podium cam]
Name input 1 “Podium cam”
X4#]
Default = Input #n
EX@,X4#NO}
E1,Main PJ1NO}
EX@NO}
NmoX@,X4#]
Nmg01,Security 1]
Name global preset 1 “Security 1”
X4#]
Nmo01,Main PJ1]
Name output 1 “Main PJ1”
Default = Output #n
X4#]
Front panel locks
NOTE: See Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes) on page 59 for more information on the Lock modes.
Lock all front panel functions
Lock advanced front panel functions
Unlock all front panel functions
E1EXEC}
E2EXEC}
E0EXEC}
Exec1]
View lock status
EEXEC}
ExecX4$]
KEY:
X@ = Output number
X# = Global preset number
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X1) = Resolution, rate for black screen
X4@ = Test pattern and resolution
X4# = Name
X4$ = Front panel lock
Exec0]
01 – 16 or 32
01 – 32
01 – 16 or 32
2 = 1280x720p @ 50 Hz
00 = Disable (default)
720p, 50 Hz
720p, 60 Hz
1080p, 60 Hz
Enable Lock mode 1.
Enable Lock mode 2.
Enable Lock mode 0.
Exec2]
4* = 1280x720p @ 60 Hz
6 = 1920x1080p @ 60 Hz
Color bars
No audio
Color bars
Audio
Black screen
No audio
Black screen
Audio
01
07
02
08
03
09
04
10
05
11
06
12
Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
0 = Lock mode 0 (unlocked)
1 = Lock mode 1
2 = Lock mode 2 (default)
*Default setting
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
111
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Save and directly write global presets
Save current configuration as a
global preset
Example:
Direct write process —
ESX#PRST}
PrstSX#]
ES8PRST}
PrstS08]
Save current ties as preset 8.
NOTE: The direct write of a global preset should always be preceded by a clear global preset ties command of that same preset number,
as shown below. In a directly-written preset, the input for each output position (or no tied input) remains unchanged unless overwritten
or cleared.
If you do not clear the ties in a global preset number before you directly write a global preset to that number, ties that are part of the
previous version of the specified preset with the same number can unexpectedly become part of the newly-created preset.
Clear global preset ties
Directly write a global preset
Example:
E+X#P0*!}
SprX#]
E+X#PX!*X@!X!*X@%X!*X@$ ... X!*X@&}
SprX#]
E+27P0*!}
Spr27]
Esc +27P12*5!10*09%3*2$3*8&
Spr27]
Clear all ties in preset X#.
Enter as many ties as are valid. The tie
all (!), tie RGB (&), tie video (%), and
tie audio ($) commands are all valid.
Clear all ties in preset 27.
Brackets are shown to separate ties for
clarity only. Create global preset 27,
which ties video and audio input 12 to
output 5, video input 10 to output 9,
audio input 3 to output 2, and video
input 3 to output 8.
Resets
Reset global presets and names
Reset one global preset
Reset audio input levels
EZG}
EX#ZG}
EZA}
Zpg]
Clear all global presets and their names.
ZpgX#]
Reset audio output levels
EZV}
Zpv]
Reset whole matrix switcher
EZXXX}
Zpx]
Clear global preset X#.
Reset all audio input levels (gain and
attenuation) to 0 dB.
Reset all audio output levels (volume)
to 100% (no attenuation).
Clear all ties and presets, reset all audio
gains to 0 dB, and reset volume to 100%.
Zpa]
NOTE: The reset whole matrix switcher (EZXXX}) command resets not only the matrix switcher, but any connected endpoints.
Absolute reset, including IP settings
EZQQQ}
Zpq]
Similar to Reset whole matrix
switcher, plus clear the IP address to
192.168.254.254 and subnet mask to
255.255.000.000.
NOTE: The absolute reset (EZQQQ}) command resets not only the matrix switcher, but any connected endpoints.
Absolute reset, excluding IP settings
EZY}
Zpy]
Similar to Absolute reset, including
IP settings (EZQQQ}), but excludes
the following IP settings: IP address,
subnet mask, gateway address,
unit name, DHCP setting, and port
mapping (telnet, Web, and direct
address).
NOTES: The absolute reset (EZY}) command:
•
•
KEY:
Preserves communications with the device and is recommended after a firmware update.
Resets not only the matrix switcher, but any connected endpoints.
X! = Input number
X@ = Output number
X# = Global preset number
00 – 16 or 32 (00 = untied)
01 – 16 or 32
00 – 32 (00 = current configuration, applies to view ties command only)
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
112
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and power usage
Read RGB (video) output tie
Example:
Read video output tie
Example:
Read audio output tie
Example:
View output volume
Example:
View input gain
Example:
View output mutes
X@&
EVM}
X!]
12]
X!]
02]
X!]
06]
X3^]
55]
X*]
-02]
X3*1X3*2 ... X3*n]
View video global preset
configuration
EX#*X@*1VC}
X!n•X!n+1•X!n+2•X!n+3•...•X!n+15•Vid]
Command description:
Response description:
5&
X@%
7%
X@$
3$
X@V
7V
X^G
4G
Video input X! is tied to output X@.
Input 12 RGB is tied to output 5.
Video input X! is tied to output X@.
Input 2 video is tied to output 7.
Audio input X! is tied to output X@.
Input 6 audio is tied to output 3.
Volume setting for output 7 is 55 (86.5)%.
Audio input 4 level is -2 dB.
Each X3* is the mute status of an output:
left = output 1, right = output n.
n = 16 or 32).
Show the video configuration for
preset X#. Show the input tied to
16 sequential outputs, starting from
output X@.
preset number*starting output # (StO#)*1(=video)VC
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#+15•Vid]
NOTES:
• The starting output number (X@) should always be “1” for the XTP CrossPoint 1600.
• EX#*X@*1VC} where X# = 0 returns the current video configuration.
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 1600, with two
output boards installed):
E3*1*1VC}
input 8 tied to output 4
input 12 tied to output 3
no tied input
�Vid
�--�--�--�--�--�--�--�--�
Response = tied input: 08�08�12�08�08�11�00�00�
Output: 1
2
3 4
5 6
7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Each position shown in the response is an output: left = starting output (1),
right = starting output +15 (output 16). The number in each position is the input tied to that output.
In this example, preset 3, video input 8 is tied to outputs 1, 2, 4, and 5; input 12 is tied to output 3;
and input 11 is tied to output 6. No inputs are tied to outputs 7 and 8.
KEY:
X! = Input number
X@ = Output number
X# = Global preset number
X^ = Input number (for other than tie)
X* = Numeric dB value
X3^ = Volume
X3* = Video and audio mute status
00 – 16 or 32 (00 = untied)
01 – 16 or 32
00 – 32 (00 = current configuration, applies to view ties command only)
01 – 16 or 32
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation) (0 dB = default)
00 – 64 (1 dB per step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB) (see the table on page 104)
0 = No mutes
4 = Analog audio mute
1 = Video mute
5 = Video and analog audio mute
2 = Digital audio mute
6 = Digital and analog audio mute
3 = Video and digital audio mute
7 = Video, digital audio, and analog audio mute
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
113
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and power usage (continued)
View audio global preset
configuration
Command description:
Response description:
EX#*X@*2VC}
X!n•X!n+1•X!n+1•X!n+2•...•X!n+15•Aud]
Show the audio configuration for preset X#.
Show the input tied to 16 sequential
outputs, starting from output X@.
preset number*starting output # (StO#)*2(=audio)VC
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#15•Aud]
NOTES:
• The starting output number (X@) should always be “1” for the XTP CrossPoint 1600.
• EX#*X@*2VC} where X# = 0 returns the current audio configuration.
Example:
(XTP II CrossPoint 3200)
E15*17*2VC}
input 1 tied to output 19
no tied input
Response = tied input: 01�01�01�01�02�12�12�00�00�00�00�00�01�08�15�16�Aud
Output: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32
View XTP power usage
Example:
Each position shown in the response is an output: left = starting output (17 in this example),
right = starting output +15 (output 32). The number in each position is the input tied to that output.
In this example, preset 15, audio input 1 is tied to outputs 17, 18, 19, 20, and 29; input 2 is tied
to output 21; input 12 is tied to outputs 22 and 23; input 8 is tied to output 30; input 15 is tied to
output 31; and input 16 is tied to output 32. No input is tied to output 24, 25, 26, 27, and 28.
ETPOEC}
X2%*X2^]
Show PoX wattage applied and the
status of the 48 V power supply.
ETPOEC}
The matrix switcher is providing 45.0
450*0]
watts and the power supply is Ok.
View and erase file directory
NOTE: The response to the View File Directory command differs, depending on whether the command is sent via SIS or sent via a Web
browser connection.
View file directory
RS-232/RS-422 port and Telnet
EDF}
See below:
List user-supplied files.
filename1•date/time•length]
filename2•date/time•length]
filename3•date/time•length]
•
•
•
•
filenamen•date/time•length]
# of•Bytes•Left]]
View file directory
Web browser
EDF}
See below:
List user-supplied files.
Var•file•=•new•array•();
File•[1]•=•‘filename1,date1,filesize1‘;
File•[2]•=•‘filename2,date2,filesize2‘;
File•[3]•=•‘filename3,date3,filesize3‘;
•
•
•
•
File•[n]•=•‘filenamen,daten,filesizen‘;
File•[n+1]•=•# of•Bytes•Left
Erase user-supplied Web pages/files
KEY:
X! = Input number (for tie)
X@ = Output number
X# = Global preset number
X2% = Wattage
X2^ = Power supply status
EfilenameEF}
Del•filename]
00 – 16 or 32 (00 = untied)
01 – 16 or 32
00 - 32 (00 = current configuration, applies to view ties command only)
Power usage in 0.1 watt increments. Example: 260 = 26.0 watts
0 = Ok
1 = Not Ok
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
114
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
I
VX4%XX4^•AX4%XX4^]
N
60-nnnn-nn]
*N
60-nnnn-nn.X4&1X4&2 ... X4&nX4*1X4*2 ... X4*n]
Information requests
Information request
Request part number
Request input/output board
configuration
V (video) matrix size•A (audio) matrix size
See the Extron Website for part numbers.
Part number, dot, 4 or 8 (n) X4&s;
each is the input board installed, starting
from input slot 1, followed by 4 or 8 (n)
X4*s; each is the output board installed.
NOTE: There are up to three separate sets of Extron firmware on which the matrix switcher can report: the controller firmware, which
is the overall control firmware; the Ethernet protocol firmware, which handles the Ethernet interface; and the latest optional Extron
firmware update, which is available at www.extron.com.
Query controller firmware version
Example:
X4(]
1.23]
Q
The factory-installed controller firmware
version is 1.23 (sample value only).
X4(-X5)-X5)]
0Q
Query controller firmware version
Detailed status of the controller firmware
(verbose)
and any firmware upgrade. The active
firmware is marked by an asterisk (*).
A caret (^) indicates a bad checksum
or an invalid load. ?.?? indicates that
firmware is not loaded.
Response description: Ethernet protocol firmware version-controller firmware version-updated firmware version
See below
0q
Example:
Q
Description
* indicates the version running
Upload date and time
1.23-1.00(1.06-XTP CP Series -Tue, 02 Dec 2010 00:00:00 GMT)-1.00*(1.06-XTP CP Series -Mon, 02 Apr 2012 16:39:21 GMT)
Ethernet protocol
firmware
KEY:
XTP II CrossPoint firmware version
X4% = Number of inputs
X4^ = Number of outputs
X4& = Installed input board
Updated firmware version
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 32
4, 8, 12, 16, 20, 24, 28, or 32
A = XTP CP 4i 4K (TP)
K = XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA
F = XTP CP 4i VGA
N = XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K
G = XTP CP 4i (TP)
P = XTP CP 4i 3G-SDI
H = XTP CP 4i HDMI
T = XTP CP 4i HD 4K PLUS
I = XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
X = No board installed
B = XTP CP 4o 4K (TP) M = XTP CP 4o SA (stereo audio)
D = XTP CP 4o (TP)
O = XTP CP 4o Fiber 4K
E = XTP CP 4o HDMI
U = XTP CP 4o HD 4K PLUS
J = XTP CP 4o DVI Pro X = No board installed
X4* = Installed output board
X4( = Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)
X5) = Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time (see the Query firmware version (verbose) command, above.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
115
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
Information requests (continued)
S
Request system status
See below
X5!•X5!•X5!•X5!•X5!•X5@•X5#•X5#•X5#•X5#•X5#•X5#•X5#•X5$X5$X5$X5$]
XTP CrossPoint 3200:
X5!•X5!•X5!•X5@•X5#•X5#•X5$X5$]
XTP CrossPoint 1600 (no redundant power supply):
X5!•X5!•X5!•X5!•X5!•X5@•X5#•X5#•X5$X5$X5$X5$]
XTP CrossPoint 1600 (redundant power supply):
Response description (XTP CrossPoint 3200):
PS1 (12 V)•PS2 (12 V)•PS3 (12 V)•PS4 (48 V)•3.3 V•°F•Fan 1 RPM (F1)•F2•F3•F4•F5•F6•F7•PS status 1 (PS1) PS2 PS3 PS4]
Response description (XTP CrossPoint 1600, without optional redundant power supply):
PS1 (12 V)•PS2 (48 V)•3.3 V•temp. (°F)•Fan 1 speed (F1)•F2•PS status 1 (PS1) PS2]
Response description (XTP CrossPoint 1600, with optional redundant power supply):
PS1 (12 V)•PS2 (48 V)•PS3 (12 V)•PS4 (48 V)•3.3 V•°F•Fan 1 speed (F1)•F2•PS status 1 (PS1) PS2 PS3 PS4]
NOTE:
•
If a primary power supply that is not backed up by a redundant supply fails, return the matrix switcher to Extron for immediate
repairs.
•
If a backed up power supply, a redundant power supply, or a cooling fan fails, return the matrix switcher at your earliest
opportunity.
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 3200):
See below
S
Temperature is 73.4 °F
All 4 power supplies installed
12.01�11.31�11.31�48.00�+3.30�+73.40�00892�00888�00892�01061�01022�00892�00888�1111
12V power supply 1 at 12.01V
View all input connections
Example
(XTP CrossPoint 3200):
KEY:
Fan 2 rotating at 888 RPM
X%1X%2X%3... X%n]
0LS
0LS
No input detected
16 or 32 (n) X%s; each is the connection
status of an input, starting from input 1.
Sync detected
Sync detected
Response Status: 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1. . .0
Input: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 32
X% = Input signal status
X5! = Voltage
X5@ = Internal temperature
X5# = Fan speed
X5$ = Power supply installation status
0 = No signal detected
1 = Signal detected
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude
Degrees Fahrenheit
RPM
0 = No power supply installed 1 = Power supply installed
Symbol definitions for IP and Remote port specific SIS commands
X6! = Matrix name
Up to 24 alphanumeric characters
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions
(see Special Characters on page 120).
X6@ = Default name
XTP-CP-nn00 + Last 3 pairs of MAC address.
nn = 16 or 32.
X6# = Time and date (for set)
In the format: MM/DD/YY•HH:mm:SS where:
MM = month: 01 (January) to 12 (December)
DD = day: 01 to 31
YY = year: 00 to 99
HH = hour: 00 to 23
mm = minute: 00 to 59
SS = second: 00 to 59
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
116
X6$ = Time and date (for read)
In the format: Day,•DD•Mmm•YYYY•HH:mm:SS
where:
Day = day of the week: Mon to Sun
DD = day: 01 to 31
Mmm = month: Jan to Dec
YYYY = year: 2000 to 2099
HH = hour: 00 to 23
mm = minute: 00 to 59
SS = second: 00 to 59
X6% = GMT offset
-12.0 to +14.0 (hours and minutes removed from
X6^ = Daylight Saving Time
0
1
2
3
X6& = IP address
X6* = Hardware (MAC) address
X6( = Number of open
###.###.###.###
X7) = Password
Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
GMT)
= Daylight Savings Time off or ignore
= Daylight Savings Time on (North America)
= Daylight Savings Time on (Europe)
= Daylight Savings Time on (Brazil)
##-##-##-##-##-##
000 to 200
connections
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions
(see Special Characters on page 120).
X7! = Domain name
Standard domain name rules apply (for example:
xxx.com)
NOTE: The @ character is acceptable only as the lead-in to the domain name
(such as @extron.com).
X7# = E-mail account
65 to 72 (65 = e-mail recipient 1, 66 = 2, 67 = 3,...
72 = recipient 8)
X7$ = E-mail address
Typical e-mail address format (for example:
nnn@xxx.com)
X7% = Notification selections,
I = inputs
F = fans
P = power supply
X7^ = Notification selections,
If X7% = I, then X7^ = 00 (all inputs, or 01 to 16 or
32 (input 1 through 16 or 32)
If X7% = F, then X7^ = 00 (all fans)
If X7% = P, then X7^ = 00 (all power supplies)
X7& = Notify when?
0
1
2
3
4
X7* = DHCP
0 = off (default)
1 = on
part 1
part 2
= no response
= fail/missing
= fixed or restored
= both 1 and 2
= suspend
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
117
X7( = Port number
01 = Remote RS-232/RS-422 port
02 = Unused
03-66 = UARTs 1-64 (XTP input and output board
ports)
X8) = Baud rate
X8! = Parity
9600 (default), 19200, 38400, 115200
X8@ = Data bits
X8# = Stop bits
7, 8 (default)
NOTE:
O
E
N
M
S
= odd
= even
= none (default)
= mark
= space
1 (default), 2
X7( to X8# and X9@ are repeated on page 84 as X1% to X2).
X8$ = Port type
0 = RS-232 (default)
1 = RS-422
X8% = Verbose mode
0 = clear or non (default for Telnet connection)
1 = verbose mode (default for RS-232 and RS-422
or USB connection)
2 = Tagged responses for queries
3 = Verbose mode and tagged for queries
NOTE: If tagged responses is enabled (modes 2 and 3), all read commands
return the constant string and the value as the set command does (for
example, the read matrix name command E CN}, returns Ipn • X1!]).
X8^ = Flow control
H = hardware
S = software
N = none (default)
X8& = Data pacing in MS
X8* = Time (in 10 MS increments)
0000 to 1000 (0000 = default)
X8( = Time (in 10 MS increments)
2 to 32767 (2 = default)
X9) = Priority status for receive
0 = use the “Send” data string command
10 to 32767 (for example, 10 = 100 MS)
to wait for characters
between characters
timeouts
parameters if they exist (default)
1 = use the Configure receive timeout command
parameters
X9! = Length of message (L) or
delimiter (D)
nnnnnL = byte count (1 to 32767 or 0 = ignore byte
length, use time)
<Delimiter>D
(for example: 13D [carriage return -
X9@ = Port timeout interval in 10
}])
1 to 65000 (30 = default)
second increments
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
118
SIS command and Response Table for IP- and Remote Port-Specific
Commands
Command Function
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Additional Description
IP and Remote port setup commands
Set matrix name
Read matrix name (location)
Reset matrix name to factory default
Set time and date
Read time and date
Set GMT offset
EX6!CN}
ECN}
E•CN}
EX6#CT}
ECT}
EX6%CZ}
Ipn•X6!]
Example:
Read GMT offset
Set Daylight Savings Time
Read Daylight Savings Time
Set IP address
Read IP address
Read hardware address
Read # of open connections
Set subnet mask
Read subnet mask
Set gateway IP address
Read gateway IP address
Set administrator password
Read administrator password
E8.3CZ}
ECZ}
EX6^CX}
ECX}
EX6&CI}
ECI}
ECH}
ECC}
EX6&CS}
ECS}
EX6&CG}
ECG}
EX7)CA}
ECA}
Ipz+08:30]
Reset (clear) administrator password
Set user password
Read user password
E•CA}
EX7)CU}
ECU}
Ipa•]
Reset (clear) user password
Set mail server, domain name
E•CU}
Ipu•]
IpmX6&,X7!,X7),,]
Read mail server, domain name
EX6&,X7!,X7)CM}
ECM}
Set e-mail recipient
EX7#,X7$CR}
IprX7#,X7$,]
Example:
X6!]
Ipn•X6@]
IptX6#]
X6$]
IpzX6%]
X6%]
IpxX6^]
X6^]
IpiX6&]
X6&]
X6*]
X6(]
IpsX6&]
X6&]
IpgX6&]
X6&]
In the command, the divider between
hours and minutes can be either a
colon or a period. In the response, the
divider is a colon.
8.3 = 8:30
Default: 192.168.254.254
Reads MAC address.
Default: 255.255.0.0
Default: 0.0.0.0
Ipa•****]
****] or ]
If there is a valid password the
response is ****]. If there is no
password, the response is ].
Ipu•****]
****] or ]
If there is a valid password the
response is ****]. If there is no
password, the response is ].
X6&,X7!,X7),,]
This command sets the recipient. To
receive e-mail notifications, you must then
set the events that the switcher reports,
using one or more separate Set e-mail
events (EM) commands (see below).
E72,Jsmith@folklore.netCR}
Ipr72,Jsmith@folklore.net,]
Read e-mail recipient
Set e-mail events for recipient
Example:
Read e-mail notifications for one
account (recipient)
EX7#CR}
EX7%,X7#,X7^,X4%EM}
IpeX7%,X7#,X7^,X4%]
EI72,0,3EM}
IpeI*72*0*3]
EX7#,X8$,X7&EM}
X8$,X8$,X8$, ... ,X8$]
X7$,]
You must first have set an e-mail
recipient for the e-mail account number
(X7#), using the separate Set e-mail (CR)
command (see above).
E-mail account #72 (recipient #8)
(Jsmith, as set by the preceding Set
e-mail recipient command), will receive
fail/missing and fixed/restore messages
for all inputs.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
119
SIS Command
Response
(Host to Unit)
(Unit to Host)
Set DHCP on or off
EX7*DH}
IdhX7*]
Read DHCP on/off status
EDH}
X7*]
Command Function
Additional Description
Default: 0 (Off)
IP and Remote port setup commands (continued)
Set serial port parameters
EX7(*X8),X8!,X8@,X8#CP}
Read serial port parameters
EX7(CP}
Configure flow control
Read flow control
Configure receive timeout
EX7(*X8^,X8&CF}
EX7(CF}
EX7(*X8*,X8(CE}
CpnX7(•CcpX8),X8!,X8@,X8#]
X8),X8!,X8@,X8#]
CpnX7(•Cfl X8^,X8&]
X8^,X8&]
CpnX7(•CceX8*,X8(,X9),X9!]
NOTE: The configure command is sufficient as shown for most users, with the priority (X9)) and length or delimiter (X9!) omitted).
The response in this case is “CpnX7(•CceX8*,X8(,0,00000L],” with the default X9) and X9! values returned.
Read receive timeout
Set mode
Read mode
Set verbose mode
Read verbose mode
Configure current port timeout
Read current port timeout
Configure global IP port timeout
Read global IP port timeout
EX7(CE}
EX7(*X8$CY}
EX7(CY}
EX8%CV}
ECV}
E0*X9@TC}
E0TC}
E1*X9@TC}
E1TC}
X8*,X8(,X9),X9!]
CpnX7(•CtyX8$]
X8$]
VrbX8%]
X8%]
Pti0*X9@]
X9@]
Pti1*X9@]
X9@]
Special Characters
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The matrix switcher
does not accept these characters are part of names, passwords, or locally created file
names.
The matrix switcher rejects the following characters:
<space (spaces are OK for names)> + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;) colon (:) | \
and ?.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Programming Guide
120
HTML Operation
The XTP CrossPoint Series can be remotely controlled via:
•
The XTP System Configuration Software (see the XTP System Configuration Software
help file, available at www.extron.com).
•
SIS commands (see Programming Guide, beginning on page 76)
•
Built-in HTML pages (see below)
This section introduces using the built-in HTML pages to operate the XTP CrossPoint
Series, including:
•
Download the Startup Page
•
Status Tab
•
Configuration Tab
•
File Management Tab
•
Control Tab
The matrix switcher can be controlled and operated through its LAN port, connected via a
LAN or WAN, using a Web browser such as the Microsoft Internet Explorer. The display in
the browser of the status or operation of the matrix switcher has the appearance of Web
pages. This chapter describes the factory-installed HTML pages, which are always available
and cannot be erased or overwritten.
NOTE: If your Ethernet connection to the matrix switcher is unstable, try turning off
the proxy server in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, click Tools >
Internet Options > Connections > LAN Settings, uncheck the Use a proxy
server... box, and then click OK.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
121
Download the Startup Page
Access the matrix switcher using HTML pages as follows:
1. Start the Web browser program.
2. Click in the Address field of the browser and highlight any existing text.
3. Enter the Matrix IP address in the Address field of the browser.
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the
factory-specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.
4. If you want the browser to display a page other than the default page (such as a custom
page that you have uploaded), enter a slash (/) and the file name to open.
NOTES:
• The Address field of the browser should display the address in the following
format: <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx>/<optional_file_name>.html.
• The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see
Special Characters on page 120).
5. Press the keyboard <Enter> key. The matrix switcher checks to see if it is
password-protected.
If the matrix switcher is not password-protected, it checks and downloads the HTML
pages (proceed to step 8).
If the matrix switcher is password-protected, the matrix switcher asks for your
password (see figure 55).
192.168.254.254
1
2
Figure 55.
Sample Password Inquiry
NOTE: A User name entry is not required.
6. Click in the Password field (see figure 55, 1) and type in the appropriate administrator
or user password.
7. Click the OK button (2).
8. The matrix switcher checks several possibilities, in the following order, and then
responds accordingly:
•
If the address includes a specific file name, such as 192.168.254.254/
<file_name>.html, the matrix switcher downloads that HTML page.
•
If there is a file in the matrix switcher memory that is named “index.html”, the
matrix switcher downloads “index.html” as the default startup page.
•
If neither of the above conditions is true, the matrix switcher downloads the
factory-installed default startup page, “nortxe_index.html” (see figure 56 on the
next page), also known as the System Status page.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
122
Status Tab
System Status Page
The System Status page (see figure 56) provides an overall view of the status of the matrix
switcher, including individual voltages, fan operation, and the serial port status. The System
Status page is the default page that the matrix switcher downloads when you connect
to the matrix switcher. Access the System Status page from other pages by clicking the
Status tab.
Figure 56.
System Status Page
The System Status page periodically refreshes itself to reflect the latest status of the matrix
switcher components. If a value changes, the display shows the change in status the next
time it refreshes.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
123
DSVP Page
The DSVP page (see figure 57) provides the connection status of the matrix switcher. Access
the DSVP page from the System Status or HDCP page by clicking the DSVP link on either
the System Status or HDCP page.
Figure 57.
DSVP Page
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
124
HDCP Page
The HDCP page (see figure 58) provides the HDCP status of inputs to and outputs from the
matrix switcher. Access the HDCP page from the System Status or DSVP page by clicking
the HDCP link on either the System Status or DSVP page.
Figure 58.
HDCP Page
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
125
Configuration Tab
System Settings Page
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher downloads the System Settings page (see
figure 59) when you click the Configuration tab (1). The screen consists of fields in
which you can view and edit IP administration and system settings. You can access the
Email Settings and Passwords pages by clicking the appropriate link (see Ethernet Link
on page 150 for basic information about IP addresses and subnetting).
192.168.254.254
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Figure 59.
8
9
¢
£
System Settings Page
On password-protected connections, there are two levels of protection: administrator and
user. Administrators have full access to all switching capabilities and editing functions. Users
can create ties, create and recall presets, set audio mutes, and view all settings with the
exception of passwords.
IP Settings panel
NOTE: Editing variables in the IP Settings panel can immediately disconnect the
user from the matrix switcher. Extron recommends editing these settings using SIS
commands (see SIS Command and Response Table for IP- and Remote PortSpecific Commands, starting on page 119) and protecting the Ethernet access to
this screen by assigning an administrator password to qualified and knowledgeable
personnel only.
The IP Settings panel (2) provides a location for viewing and editing settings unique to
the Ethernet interface. After editing any of the settings on this page, click the Submit button
at the bottom of the page to save the changes.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
126
Unit Name field
The Unit Name field (see figure 59 on the previous page, 3) contains the name used as
the “from” information when the matrix switcher e-mails notification of its failed or repaired
status. This name field can be any valid name, up to 24 alphanumeric characters.
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see
Special Characters on page 120).
DHCP radio buttons
The DHCP On radio button (4) directs the matrix switcher to ignore any entered IP
addresses and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
server (if the network is DHCP capable). The DHCP Off radio button turns DHCP off.
Contact the local system administrator to determine if DHCP is appropriate.
IP Address field
The IP Address field (5) contains the IP address of the connected matrix switcher. This
value is encoded in the blink memory of the matrix switcher.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric octets separated by dots
(periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to 3 digits
total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
The factory-installed default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with other
equipment, you should ask your network administrator for a new, valid address.
NOTE: IP address changes can cause conflicts with other equipment. Only local system
administrators should change IP addresses.
Gateway IP Address field
The Gateway IP Address field (6) identifies the address of the gateway to the mail server
to be used if the matrix switcher and the mail server are not on the same subnet.
The gateway IP address has the same validity rules as the system IP address.
Subnet Mask field
The Subnet Mask field (7) is used to determine whether the matrix switcher is on the same
subnet as the mail server when you are subnetting. For more information, see Subnetting
— A Primer, beginning on page 155.
MAC Address field
The Media Access Control (MAC) Address listing (8) is hardcoded in the matrix switcher
and can be changed only as part of a firmware update.
Firmware field
The Firmware field identifies (9) the installed firmware version. This field is hardcoded in
the matrix switcher and cannot be changed.
Model field
The Model field (¢) identifies the number of video and audio inputs and outputs. This field
is hardcoded in the matrix switcher and cannot be changed.
Part Number field
The Part Number field (£) identifies the part number of your matrix switcher. This field is
hardcoded in the matrix switcher and cannot be changed.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
127
Date/Time Settings panel
The Date/Time Settings panel (see figure 60) provides a location for viewing and setting
the time functions.
1
3
2
Figure 60.
4
Date/Time Settings Panel
Change the date and time settings as follows:
1. Click the drop-down list for the desired value (see figure 60, 1). The adjustable
variables are month, day, year, hours, minutes, AM/PM, and (time) zone. A drop-down
list appears (the year list is selected in figure 60).
2. If necessary, click and drag the slider or click the scroll up
scroll down button until the desired value is visible.
button or the
3. Click the desired value (2).
NOTES:
• If setting the time, set the local time. The Zone drop-down list allows you to
then enter the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).
• The Zone drop-down list identifies the standard time zone selected and
displays the amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local time varies
from the GMT international time reference.
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for other variables that need to be changed.
5. If appropriate, select the appropriate Daylight Savings radio button (3) to turn on
the daylight savings time feature for your region or nation.
NOTE: When Daylight Savings is turned on, the matrix switcher automatically
updates its internal clock between Standard Time and Daylight Savings Time in
the spring and fall on the date that the time change occurs in the country or region
selected. When Daylight Savings is turned off, the matrix switcher does not
adjust its time reference.
6. Click the Submit button (4).
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
128
Passwords Page
Access the Passwords page (see figure 61) by clicking the Passwords link (1) on the left of
the System Settings, Email Settings, or Firmware Upgrade page.
192.168.254.254
32
1
2
2
3
Figure 61.
Passwords Page
NOTE: If the matrix switcher is password-protected, fields on this page can be edited
only by people logged in as administrators.
The fields on the Passwords page are for entering and verifying administrator and user
passwords. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to as many as 12 upper-case
and lower-case alphanumeric characters. Each password must be entered twice; once
in the Password field and then again in the Re-enter Password field (see figure 61, 2).
Characters in these fields are masked by asterisks (*****). If you do not want to password
protect an access level, leave the Password field and the Re-enter Password field blank.
After entering the password in both fields, click the Submit button (3).
NOTE: An administrator password must be created before a user password can be
created.
Resetting a password
Reset an existing password so that no password is required as follows:
1. Replace any existing password by entering a single space character in the Password
and Re-enter Password fields (see figure 61, 2).
2. Click the Submit button (3).
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
129
Email Settings Page
Reach the Email Settings page by clicking the Email Settings link (see figure 62, 1)
on the left of the System Settings, Passwords, or Firmware Upgrade page. The Email
Settings page has fields for setting up the e-mail notification capabilities of the matrix
switcher. For the e-mail settings and for each row of the e-mail notification settings, click the
Edit button (2) to make the fields available for editing. The button changes to Save. After
editing the settings associated with the Edit/Save button, click the Save button.
192.168.254.254
32
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 62.
7
8
9
¢ £
2
7
8
9
¢ £
2
7
8
9
¢ £
2
Email Settings Page
Email Settings pane
The Email Settings panel displays the Mail IP Address (3) and the Domain Name
(4) of the mail server that handles the e-mail for the facility in which the matrix switcher is
installed.
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric octets separated by dots
(periods). Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to three
digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
130
Setting up SMTP authorization
If desired, set the XTP CrossPoint to require SMTP authorization before accepting any
e-mail as follows:
1. Click Edit (see figure 62 on the previous page, 2). The button changes to Save.
2. Check the SMTP Authorization Required check box (5). This enables the User
Name and Password fields below the check box.
3. Enter a user name and a password in the User Name and Password fields (6). For the
XTP CrossPoint to accept their e-mail messages, senders must enter the user name
and password.
NOTES:
• For the User name, any combination of letters, numerals, spaces, and symbols
except the comma (,) and the single and double quotation marks (‘ and “) are
valid. For the password, all characters except the comma are valid. The user
name and password can each be from 1 to 30 characters.
• Both a user name and a password must be specified.
4. Click Save to save the user name and password (2).
Deselecting SMTP authorization
Remove SMTP authorization as follows:
1. Click Edit (2). The button changes to Save.
2. Click (deselect) the SMTP Authorization Required check box (4).
3. Click Save (2).
Domain Name field
The Domain Name field (4) displays the domain name that the XTP CrossPoint Series
matrix switcher uses to log on to the e-mail server. Standard domain name conventions (for
example: xxx.com) apply.
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see
Special Characters on page 120). The @ character is acceptable only as the lead-in
to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).
Email Address fields
The five Email Address fields (7) identify the e-mail addresses of the personnel to whom
the XTP II CrossPoint Series matrix switcher e-mails notification of its failure and repair
status. Standard e-mail address conventions (nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.
The check boxes and drop boxes associated with each address field permit the operator
to specify specific criteria under which the matrix switcher will e-mail recipients. In the
associated Missing Inputs scroll boxes (8), select the inputs to monitor for presence
or absence of a signal. Check the Fans (9) and Power (¢) boxes to monitor the cooling
and power supplies. In the associated Email Options drop-down list (£), select whether
the recipient is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, not notified, or to be removed from
the e-mail list. The Suspend option is useful for temporarily removing personnel from the
e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as if travelling or on vacation. Deleting an e-mail
addressee and clicking the Save button (2) removes the recipient from e-mail notification
completely.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
131
Firmware Upgrade Page
NOTE: The Firmware Upgrade page is only for replacing the matrix switcher firmware
To insert your own custom HTML pages, see File Management Page on page 134.
The Firmware Upgrade page is for replacing the matrix switcher firmware. Access the
Firmware Upgrade page by clicking the Firmware Upgrade link (see figure 63, 1) on the
left of the System Settings, Passwords, or Email Settings page.
192.168.254.254
32
1
Figure 63.
Firmware Upgrade Page
Downloading Firmware
Update the matrix switcher firmware as follows:
1. On the Extron website, www.extron.com, go to the Download tab and click
Firmware (see figure 64, 1).
Figure 64.
Downloading Firmware from the Extron Website
2. Navigate to the desired product (see figure 65, 2).
Figure 65.
Downloading Firmware from the Extron Website
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
132
3. Ensure the available firmware version is a later version than the current one on the
device, and click the Download link (3).
NOTE: The firmware release notes are a PDF file that provides details about the
changes between different firmware versions. The file can be downloaded from the
same page as the firmware.
Updating Firmware
1. Connect the PC to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher via the LAN port of the
matrix switcher.
2. Access the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher using HTML pages (see Download
the Startup Page on page 122).
3. Click the Configuration tab (see figure 66, 1).
1
2
3
6
4
5
Figure 66.
Firmware Upgrade
4. Click the Firmware Upgrade link (2).
5. Click the Browse button (3). An open file window appears.
6. Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file and select it (4).
ATTENTION:
• The firmware file must have an .s19 extension. Other file types can cause the
switcher to stop functioning.
• Le firmware doit avoir une extension .s19. D’autres types de fichiers peuvent
nuire au fonctionnement de l’émetteur.
NOTE: The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the matrix
switcher. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the matrix switcher
reverts to the factory-installed firmware.
7. Click the Open button (5).
8. Click the Upload button (6). The firmware upload to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix
switcher may take a few minutes.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
133
File Management Tab
File Management Page
To delete files such as user-supplied HTML pages from the matrix switcher or to upload your
own files to the matrix switcher, click the File Management tab (see figure 67, 1). The
matrix switcher downloads the File Management page.
Figure 67.
File Management Page
NOTE: The files listed in figure 67 are shown for example only and may not be present
on your matrix switcher.
To delete a file, click the Delete button associated with that file (2).
Upload your own files as follows:
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see
Special Characters on page 120).
1. Click the Browse button (3).
2. Browse through your system and select the desired file of files.
NOTE: If you want one of the pages that you create and upload to be the default
startup page, name that file “index.html.”
3. Click the Upload File button (4). The file or files that you selected appear in the list.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
134
Control Tab
Set and View Ties Page
You can create ties on the Set and View Ties page. Access the Set and View Ties page
by clicking the Control tab (see figure 68, 1).
1
2
4
3
Figure 68.
User Control Ties page
The page consists of a matrix of input (rows) and output (columns) selection buttons of four
different colors:
•
Amber buttons indicate video and audio ties.
•
Green buttons indicate video only ties.
•
Red buttons indicate audio only ties.
•
Gray buttons indicate no ties.
The page displays only those inputs and outputs that are available on installed boards only.
Select and switch an input as follows:
1. Click the Video Only, Audio Only, or Video & Audio button (2) to select video,
audio, or both for switching (audio follow or audio breakaway). Each mouse click on a
button toggles the other two buttons off.
2. Move the mouse over the matrix of input and output buttons (3). Click a button to create
a pending tie (if a tie does not exist) or pending untie (if a tie exists) of the input and output
associated with that button. A “P” (for pending) appears in the button.
NOTES:
• If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let the
mouse rest over one of the tie buttons for a moment. A field pops up (as shown
on figure 68) that identifies the input and output for that button.
• To tie an input to all outputs, click that input number.
3. Click the Take button (4) to make the configuration changes or the Cancel button to
abandon the configuration changes.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
135
Input Adjustments Page
The Input Adjustments page is a central location for changing how input video and audio
are processed and switched. Access the page by clicking the Input Adjustments link
(see figure 69, 1) on the left of the Set and View Ties, Output Adjustments, EDID
Configuration, XTP Power, or Presets page.
The page tailors the options available for selection for the input boards installed. Options that
are not compatible with an input type are unavailable for selection.
NOTE: All options are available for selection for XTP CP 4i and XTP CP 4i 4K (XTP input)
boards. If the input to an endpoint connected to the XTP board is compatible with the
option, the adjustment is made. The Input Adjustments page indicates the change
regardless.
Possible adjustments include:
•
Auto Image (2) — Available for inputs on XTP CP 4i VGA (analog video) boards.
•
HDCP Authorized (3) — Available for inputs on XTP CP 4i, XTP CP 4i 4K,
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K, XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA,
and XTP CP 4i DVI Pro boards.
•
Gain/Attenuation (4) — Available for inputs on all boards. Unavailable if HDMI is
selected in the Audio Breakaway Select drop-down list.
•
Audio Breakaway Select (5) — Available for inputs on XTP CP 4i, XTP CP 4i 4K,
XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K, XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA,
and XTP CP 4i DVI Pro boards.
1
3 4
5
2
Figure 69.
Input Adjustments Page
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
136
Selecting audio breakaway
NOTES:
• Available for inputs on XTP CP 4i (XTP), XTP CP 4i 4K (XTP), XTP CP 4i Fiber 4K,
XTP II CP 4i HD 4K PLUS, XTP CP 4i HDMI, XTP CP 4i HDMI DMA, and
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro boards.
• When HDMI is selected, the matrix switcher routes the audio embedded in the
digital input.
• When Analog is selected, the matrix switcher routes the analog audio from the
associated analog audio port.
• When Auto is selected, digital audio takes priority over analog audio.
You can select the input audio for output as follows:
1. Click the Audio Breakaway Select drop-down list for the desired
input (1, right). A drop-down list appears.
2. Click the desired setting, Auto, HDMI, or Analog (2).
1
2
Changing the input gain and attenuation
You can set the level of gain or attenuation (-18 dB to +24 dB) of each
analog audio input from the Input Adjustments page. Adjust the audio
levels so there are no noticeable volume differences between sources.
1
Change the gain and attenuation setting for an analog audio input as
follows:
1. Click the Input Audio Level drop-down list for the desired input
(1, right). A drop-down list appears.
2. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up button or the
scroll down button until the desired value is visible.
3. Click and the desired value (2).
2
NOTE: As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, or to listen to the
audio as you make adjustments, click on the up button or
down button.
Output Adjustments Page
The Output Adjustments page is a central location for changing how
output video and audio are processed and muted. Access the page by
clicking the Output Adjustments link (see figure 70, 1 on the next page) on the left of
the Set and View Ties, Input Adjustments, EDID Configuration, XTP Power, or
Presets page.
The page tailors the options available for selection when a XTP CP 4o SA (analog audio)
output board is installed. Allow Audio Only and Audio Breakaway Select are not
available for selection.
NOTE: All options are available for selection for XTP CP 4o and XTP CP 4o 4K
(XTP output) boards. If the output from an endpoint connected to the XTP board is
compatible with the option, the adjustment is made. The Output Adjustments page
indicates the change regardless.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
137
1
2
3
Figure 70.
4
5
Output Adjustments Page
Possible adjustments include:
•
Allow Audio Only (2)
•
Volume (3)
•
Mute (4)
•
Embedded Audio Select (5)
Changing the output volume level
You can set the volume level for each analog audio output volume level from
the I/O Settings page. Volume is adjustable through a range of zero steps
of attenuation (full attenuation, minimum volume) to 64 steps of attenuation
(no attenuation, full volume).
Change the audio volume setting for an output as follows:
1
2
1. Click the Volume drop-down list for the desired output (1, right). A
drop-down list appears.
2. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up
down button until the desired value is visible.
button or the scroll
3. Click and the desired value (2).
NOTES:
• As an alternative to steps 2 and 3, or to listen to the audio as
you make adjustments, click on the up button or down
button.
• The table, on the next page, defines the value of each audio
volume step.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
138
Number
dB of
of Steps Attenuation
Output
Volume
Number
dB of
of Steps Attenuation
Output
Volume
Number
dB of
of Steps Attenuation
Output
Volume
00
76
0%
22
42
37%
44
20
70%
01
63
5.5%
23
41
38.5%
45
19
71.5%
02
62
7%
24
40
40%
46
18
73%
03
61
8.5%
25
39
41.5%
47
17
74.5%
04
60
10%
26
38
43%
48
16
76%
05
59
11.5%
27
37
44.5%
49
15
77.5%
06
58
13%
28
36
46%
50
14
79%
07
57
14.5%
29
35
47.5%
51
13
80.5%
08
56
16%
30
34
49%
52
12
82%
09
55
17.5%
31
33
50.5%
53
11
83.5%
10
54
19%
32
32
52%
54
10
85%
11
53
20.5%
33
31
53.5%
55
9
86.5%
12
52
22%
34
30
55%
56
8
88%
13
51
23.5%
35
29
56.5%
57
7
89.5%
14
50
25%
36
28
58%
58
6
91%
15
49
26.5%
37
27
59.5%
59
5
92.5%
16
48
28%
38
26
61%
60
4
94%
17
47
29.5%
39
25
62.5%
61
3
95.5%
18
46
31%
40
24
64%
62
2
97%
19
45
32.5%
41
23
65.5%
63
1
98.5%
20
44
34%
42
22
67%
64
0
100%
21
43
35.5%
43
21
68.5%
Muting and unmuting an audio output
Mute and unmute a video output, audio output, or both as follows:
1. Click either the Video, Audio, or Video & Audio
button to select the output signal stream to mute.
2. To mute and unmute an output, click the A/V Mute button associated with
an output. Each click toggles the mute status.
3. To mute or unmute all outputs, click the Mute All or Unmute
All button, as desired.
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
139
EDID Configuration Page
The EDID Configuration page allows you to select the EDID for each installed input and
save the output 1 EDID to one of the user locations. Access the page by clicking the EDID
Configuration link (see figure 71, 1) on the left of the Set and View Ties, Input
Adjustments, Output Adjustments, XTP Power, or Global Presets page.
The page displays the EDID drop boxes for inputs on installed boards only.
1
Figure 71.
EDID Configuration Page
NOTE: The page displays the EDID drop boxes for inputs and outputs on installed
boards only.
Changing the EDID setting
Select the EDID for an input as follows:
1. Click the drop-down list for the desired input (1, right).
A drop-down list appears.
1
2. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up
button or the scroll down button until the desired
value is visible.
3. Click the desired value (2).
2
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
140
XTP Power Page
The XTP Power page provides a location to enable and disable PoX for all XTP inputs and
outputs. Access the XTP Power page by clicking the XTP Power link (see figure 72, 1) on
the left of the Set and View Ties, Input Adjustments, Output Adjustments, EDID
Configuration, or Presets page.
Select (check) and deselect (uncheck) the Enable Power box (2) to enable and disable
PoX.
NOTES:
• PoX is supplied by the XTP CrossPoint 48 V power supply.
• XTP CrossPoint 1600:
• Can power up to 28 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 364 watts.
• Is available with optional 48 V power supply redundancy.
• XTP CrossPoint 3200:
• Can power up to 24 total (input and output) endpoints at up to 312 watts.
• No 48 V power supply redundancy is available.
1
2
Figure 72.
XTP Power Page
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
141
Global Presets Page
You can save and recall global presets from the Global Presets page. Access the Global
Presets page by clicking the Presets link (see figure 73, 1) on the left of the Set and
View Ties, Input Adjustments, Output Adjustments, EDID Configuration, or XTP
Power page.
1
2
3
Figure 73.
5
6
4
Global Presets Page
Saving a preset
Save the current configuration (configuration 0) as a preset as follows:
1. Click the Save Preset button (2).
2. Select the desired preset by clicking on one of the presets listed (3). To create a new
preset, click one of the [unassigned] buttons (4). Overwrite an existing preset by
clicking an already existing preset.
3. If desired, type over the current name in the box adjacent to the Save Preset button
(5).
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see
Special Characters on page 120.
If you do not rename an unassigned button, the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher
names the preset as Preset <next available number>.
If you do not rename an existing preset when it is overwritten, the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher retains the same name.
4. Click the Accept button (6).
Recalling a preset
To recall a global preset as the current configuration, click the button associated with the
desired preset (2).
XTP CrossPoint Series • HTML Operation
142
Maintenance and
Modifications
This section covers XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher topics, including:
•
Mounting the Matrix Switcher
•
Battery and Power Precautions
•
Removing and Installing an Input or Output Board or Blank Panel
•
Removing and Installing Button Labels
ATTENTION:
• Installation and service must be performed by authorized personnel only.
• L’installation et l’entretien doivent être effectués par le personnel autorisé
uniquement.
Mounting the Matrix Switcher
The XTP CrossPoint 3200 is housed in a rack-mountable, 10U enclosure.
The XTP CrossPoint 1600 is in a 5U high enclosure. All models have built-in mounting
flanges for standard 19-inch wide racks.
UL Guidelines
The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) guidelines pertain to the installation of the
matrix switcher into a rack.
•
Elevated operating ambient temperature — If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack
assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater
than room ambient. Therefore, consider installing the equipment in an environment
compatible with the maximum ambient temperature specified by Extron (Tma = +32 to
+122 °F [0 to +50 °C]).
•
Reduced air flow — Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the
amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.
•
Mechanical loading — Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a
hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.
•
Circuit overloading — Consideration should be given to the connection of the
equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might have
on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of equipment
nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.
•
Reliable earthing (grounding) — Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment
should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other
than direct connections to the branch circuit (such as the use of power strips).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
143
Mounting Instructions
If desired, rack mount the matrix switcher as follows:
1. Insert the unit into the rack, aligning the mounting bracket holes with those in the rack.
2. Secure the matrix switcher to the rack using the supplied bolts.
Battery and Power Precautions
The matrix switchers are each provided with a permanently installed (factory-soldered
in place) lithium battery. The battery maintains the real time clock in the event of power
failure or extended storage periods and does not affect the normal operation of the matrix
switcher. If the battery becomes ineffective, return the matrix switcher to Extron for repair.
WARNING: There is a danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do
not attempt to remove or replace the internal battery.
AVERTISSEMENT : Si la pile est mal remplacée, il y a un risque d’explosion. N’essayez
pas de retirer ou de remplacer la batterie interne.
Removing and Installing an Input or Output Board or Blank Panel
Circuit boards can be replaced for fault correction. They can be added or removed to
increase or decrease the Input or output configuration (size) of the XTP CrossPoint Series
matrix switcher.
ATTENTION:
• Do not touch the electronic components or the backplane or circuit board
connectors without being electrically grounded. Handle circuit boards by their
edges only. ESD can damage circuits, even if you cannot feel, see, or hear it.
• Ne pas toucher les composants électroniques ou les connecteurs sur la carte mère
ou sur les circuits imprimés sans être électriquement relié à la terre. Manipuler les
circuits imprimés en les tenant seulement par leurs bords. ESD peuvent
endommager l’équipement, même si vous ne pouvez pas le sentir, le voir ou
l’entendre.
NOTES:
• For proper cooling and air flow, boards or blank panels should be installed in all
locations during normal matrix switcher operations.
• The Input and output boards are hot-swappable. You do not need to power down
the matrix switcher to remove or install an input or output board.
Removing an Input or Output Board or Blank Panel
Remove an Input or output board or blank panel as follows:
1. For an input or output board, disconnect any connected cables.
2. Rotate the top and bottom (XTP CrossPoint 3200) or left and right
(XTP CrossPoint 1600) knurled knobs (see figure 74 on the next page) to completely
loosen the screws.
3. Gently pull on the screws to loosen the board or panel from the backplane.
4. Slide the board or panel out of the chassis and place it on an anti-static surface or in an
anti-static container.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
144
Align with
Plastic Guides
XTP CP 4o SA
R
XTP CP 4o
Tx Rx
L
IR
INPUTS
XTP CP 4o
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
R
IR
RS-232
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
L
IR
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro
R
RS-232
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
R
AUDIO
IR
L
RS-232
Tx Rx
L
IR
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
Tx Rx
R
RS-232
Tx Rx
IR
Tx Rx
RS-232
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
OUT
OUT
XTP CP 4o DVI Pro
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
OUT
OUT
OUT
L
Tx Rx
R
R
RS-232
Tx Rx
IR
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
RS-232
IR
RS-232
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
LINK
SIG
PWR
LAN LINK
L
OUT
ACT
XTP
I
XTP
XTP
R
L
LINK
R
IO
AUD
XTP
L
R
R
L
L
R
IR
RS-2
LINK
LAN
XTP
R
ET
ACT
RES
XTP
OVER
32
-232
IR/RS
RS-2
L
IR
LAN
RS-2
OTE
-42
REM/RS
232
K
LIN
RS-2
32
Tx
16
13−
Tx
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
Rx
R
L
HDM
DVI
CP
XTP
CP
Pro
4o
I
XTP
R
4o
SA
CP
4i
HDM
L
R
IO
AUD
L
R
L
R
IO
AUD
32
IR
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
LINK
Tx
Tx
Tx
ACT
Tx
32
IR
2
RS-
4o
4o
XTP
L
R
PWR
IN
CP
CP
R
IO
AUD
L
L
SIG
IN
2
4i
L
LINK
LAN
ACT
5−8
90°
Pro
VGA
R
SIG
9−1
4i
L
LAN
ACT
XTP
XTP
R
L
L
R
L
R
SIG
LINK
L
LAN
ACT
PWR
XTP
LINK
SIG
LINK
LAN
T
OU
1−4
ACT
PWR
IN
OUTPUTS
5−8
IN
2
9−1
IN
T
OU
LINK
LAN
ACT
PWR
XTP
LINK
LINK
LAN
ACT
PWR
XTP
T
OU
16
IN
13−
XTP
LINK
SIG
T
OU
SIG
IN
Knurled Knobs
XTP CrossPoint 3200
Figure 74.
CP
R
IO
ER
-240V
100- 50-6
IN
Knurled Knobs
A MAX
0Hz
XTP CrossPoint 1600
Input or Output Board Replacement
Installing an Input or Output Board or Blank Panel
IN
Install an input or output board or blank panel as follows:
1. For an input or output board, orient the board to be installed so that the silkscreened word “In” or “Out” is right-side up and to the top (XTP CrossPoint 3200)
or to the left (XTP CrossPoint 1600) (see figure 75).
Figure 75.
OUT
OUT
Board Orientation
IN
POW
ECT RE
ONN
D BEFO
ICING
DISC
COR
SERV
XTP
R
R
IN
0Hz
50-6
Rx
Rx
L
PWR
LINK
SIG
PWR
LINK
IN
MAX
240V
AUD
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
L
LINK
LAN
ACT
IN
PWR
OUT
PWR
Tx Rx
XTP CP 4o HDMI
L
R
R
L
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
R
R
L
L
AUDIO
R
R
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
L
L
R
L
L
R
XTP CP 4i
Tx Rx
IR
AUDIO
XTP CP 4i
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
IR
RS-232
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i VGA
IR
R
RS-232
Tx Rx
Tx Rx
RS-232
Tx Rx
IR
Tx Rx
RS-232
Tx Rx
IR
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
XTP
ACT
LINK
SIG
XTP
PWR
LAN LINK
ACT
LINK
XTP
SIG
LINK
Rx
Rx
Rx
Rx
PWR
LINK
SIG
1−4
IN
PWR
Tx Rx
RS-232
LAN LINK
ACT
PWR
ACT
XTP
ACT
LINK
SIG
XTP
PWR
LAN LINK
LINK
SIG
LINK
SIG
LINK
LAN LINK
XTP
ACT
LINK
SIG
XTP
PWR
LAN LINK
LINK
SIG
R
L
SIG
LAN LINK
XTP CP 4i VGA
L
IR
Tx Rx
R
R
L
RS-232
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
Tx Rx
IR
Tx Rx
RS-232
LAN LINK
IR
Tx Rx
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
R
RS-232
Tx Rx
L
R
L
IR/RS-232 OVER XTP
L
R
R
XTP CP 4i DVI Pro
R
L
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
XTP CP 4i HDMI
L
R
L
AUDIO
R
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
AUDIO
L
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
R
AUDIO
R
XTP CP 4i HDMI
L
R
L
L
L
L
R
Tx
Tx
Tx
Tx
32
IR
Tx
Tx
OUT
--A
100-
RS-2
XTP
32
IR
32
CP
L
IR
RS-2
DVI
4i
XTP
R
IO
OVER
32
-232
RS-2
IR/RS
RS-2
IN
L
O
U
T
P
U
T
S
CP
XTP
R
IR
L
AUD
R
L
R
L
OUT
ET
RES
I
N
P
U
T
S
90 °
OUT
ACT
LAN K
LIN
L
L
OUT
OUT
R
IN
OUT
IN
AUDIO
IN
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
IN
OUT
IN
OTE
S422
REM
232/R
RS
IN
IN
IN
OUT
R
XTP CP 4o HDMI
Align with
Plastic Guides
2. For an input or output board, align the board with the top and bottom
(XTP CrossPoint 3200) or left and right (XTP CrossPoint 1600) chassis guides (see
figure 74).
ATTENTION:
• Ensure the board goes straight into the chassis, and not angled to either side.
Damage to the board may occur.
• Assurez-vous que la carte s’emboîte parfaitement dans le châssis, sans
aucune inclinaison latérale, étant donné les risques de détérioration de la
carte..
3. Gently slide the board or blank panel into the enclosure. For an input or output
board, slide the board toward the front panel until it meets resistance.
4. Gently seat the board or panel in the backplane.
5. Use a screwdriver to tighten the captive screws that lock the board or panel in place.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
145
Removing and Installing Button Labels
Making Labels Using the Button-Label Generator Program
The Button Label Generator creates labels that you can place in the translucent covers of
the input and output selection buttons. You can create labels with names, alphanumeric
characters, or even color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input and output selection (see
Installing Labels in the Buttons on page 148 for the procedure for removing and
replacing the translucent covers).
Installing the Button Label Generator software
The Extron Button Label Generator is available on the Extron website, www.extron.com,
under the Download tab. Click the Software link (see figure 76, 1), and download and
install the program on your PC.
Figure 76.
Location of Software on the Website
By default, the Windows installation creates a folder for the software, as follows:
•
64-bit OS: C:\Program Files (x86)\Extron\ButtonLabelGenerator
•
32-bit OS: C:\Program Files\Extron\ButtonLabelGenerator
The installation also places the Button Label Generator icon into a group or folder named
“Extron Electronics.”
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
146
Using the Button-Label Generator software
1. Click Start > Programs > Extron Electronics > Button Label Generator >
Button Label Generator. The Button-Label Generator window opens (see figure 77).
Figure 77.
Extron Button-Label Generator Window
2. In the Systems selection box, choose the Matrix Switchers 3232 option to match,
as closely as possible, the button label size and quantities for your matrix switcher.
3. Using normal Windows controls, you can create and print labels that can be placed in
the label windows on the front panel of the matrix switcher.
NOTE: For best results, print on transparent or translucent material.
4. Click the Clear All Buttons button and create new labels as many times as
necessary to make all of the button labels that you need.
To access the help program, click the Help menu.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
147
Making Labels from Paper Templates
Figure 79 on the next page provides strips of blank button labels. If desired, copy them or
cut them out, write button information in each button area as desired, and put them in the
windows of the input or output buttons.
Installing Labels in the Buttons
Install new labels in the front panel buttons as follows:
1. Remove the button from the matrix switcher; use a small, flat bladed screwdriver such
as an Extron Tweeker to gently pry a button out from the front panel (see figure 78).
Base
TE
XT
Diffuser
Clear Lens
Button Label
Pry the two
pieces apart.
Separate the twopiece button here at
the corner.
Figure 78.
Illuminated Button Label Replacement
2. Locate the notch in the corner of one side of the clear button cap lens.
3. Separate the white backing (diffuser) from the clear button cap (lens); insert the blade of
the small screwdriver into the corner notch and gently twist the blade.
4. Save the translucent, white diffuser, but remove the text/label insert from the transparent
button cap lens.
5. Insert the replacement button label into the button cap. Check for correct label
orientation.
6. Align the white diffuser plate with the cap (lens). The bumps on the diffuser plate should
be aligned (top and bottom) with the notches on the clear button cap. Firmly snap it into
place.
7. Align the tabs on the base of the matrix switcher with the notches on the diffuser plate.
Gently, but firmly, press the reassembled button into place in the front panel of the
matrix switcher.
8. Repeat steps 1 to 7 as needed to relabel other buttons.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
148
Button Label Blanks
Figure 79.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Maintenance and Modifications
149
Ethernet Connection
This section provides a high level discussion of the Ethernet connection to the matrix
switcher and a primer on the subject of subnetting. Topics that are covered, include:
•
Ethernet Link
•
Subnetting — A Primer
Ethernet Link
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can be
connected to an Ethernet LAN or WAN. This connection makes SIS control of the matrix
switcher possible using a computer or control system connected to the same LAN.
Ethernet Connection
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and
must be properly terminated for your application (see figure 80).
•
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher
•
Patch (straight-through) cable — Connection of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix
switcher to an Ethernet LAN
Pins:
12345678
Straight-through Cable
Crossover Cable
(for connection to a switch, hub, or router)
End 1
Pin Wire Color
Side View
Insert Twisted
Pair Wires
RJ-45 Connector
Figure 80.
(for direct connection to a PC)
End 2
Pin Wire Color
End 1
Pin Wire Color
End 2
Pin Wire Color
1
white-orange
1
white-orange
1
white-orange
1
white-green
2
orange
2
orange
2
orange
2
green
3
white-green
3
white-green
3
white-green
3
white-orange
4
blue
4
blue
4
blue
4
blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
5
white-blue
6
green
6
green
6
green
6
orange
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
7
white-brown
8
brown
8
brown
8
brown
8
brown
RJ-45 Connector Pinout Tables
Default IP Address
To access the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher via the LAN port, you need the
IP address of the matrix switcher. If the address has been changed to an address
comprised of words and characters, you can determine the actual numeric IP address
using the ping utility. If the address has not been changed, the factory-specified default is
192.168.254.254.
Ping can also be used to test the Ethernet link to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
150
Pinging to Determine the Extron IP Address
The ping utility is available at the Command prompt. Ping tests the Ethernet interface
between the computer and the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher. Ping can also be
used to determine the actual numeric IP address from an alias and to determine the Web
address.
Ping the matrix switcher as follows:
1. Search for cmd in the taskbar (Windows 10) or the Start menu (Windows 10-Vista).
2. Select cmd.
3. At the C:\ prompt, type ping <IP address> and then press <Enter>. The computer
returns a display similar to the one shown in figure 81.
Figure 81.
Typical Ping Response
The line Pinging ... reports the actual numeric IP address, regardless of whether you
entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias name.
Pinging to Determine the Web IP Address
The ping utility has a modifier, -a, that directs the command to return the Web address
rather than the numeric IP address.
At the C:\ prompt, type ping -a <IP address> and then press <Enter>. The return
display is similar to the ping response shown in figure 81, except that when you specify the
-a modifier, the line Pinging mail... reports the Web IP address rather than the numeric
IP address, regardless of whether you entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias
name.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
151
Configuring the XTP CrossPoint Series Matrix Switcher for Network
Use via the ARP Command
The ARP (address resolution protocol) command tells your computer to associate the
MAC (media access control) address of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher with the
assigned IP address. You must then use the ping utility to access the controller, at which
point the IP address of the controller is reconfigured.
Use ARP to configure the IP address as follows:
1. Obtain a valid IP address for the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher from your
network administrator.
2. Obtain the MAC address (UID #) of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher from the
label on its rear panel. The MAC address should have this format: 00-05-A6-xx-xx-xx.
3. If the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher has never been configured and is still set
for factory defaults, proceed to step 4. If not, perform a mode 4 system reset and then
proceed to step 4. For detailed information on reset modes, see Performing Soft
System Resets (Resets 3, 4, and 5) on page 65.
NOTE: The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher must be configured with
the factory default IP address (192.168.254.254) before the ARP command is
executed, as described below.
4. At the PC, access the C:\ prompt (see Pinging to Determine the Extron IP Address
on the previous page, steps 1 and 2) and enter the arp –s command. Type in the
desired new IP address for the unit (obtained in step 1) and the MAC address of the unit
(from the rear panel of the unit). For example:
arp –s 10.200.254.254 00-05-A6-03-69-B0 and then press <Enter>.
The computer returns the command prompt (C:\).
After you issue the arp -s command, the controller changes to the new address and
starts responding to the ping requests to the new address, as described in the next step.
NOTE: You must ping the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher for the IP address
change to take place.
5. Execute a ping command by entering ping followed by a space and the new IP address
at the command prompt. For example:
ping 10.200.254.254
NOTE: You can reconnect using either Telnet or a Web browser to verify that the
update was successful.
6. After verifying that the IP address change was successful, enter and issue the arp –d
command at the C:\ prompt. For example:
arp –d 192.168.254.254 removes 192.168.254.254 from the ARP table
or
arp –d* removes all static IP addresses from the ARP table.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
152
Connecting as a Telnet Client
The Microsoft Telnet utility is available from the C:\ prompt. Telnet allows you to input SIS
commands to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher from the PC via the Ethernet link
and the LAN.
Access the C:\ prompt and start Telnet as follows:
1. Search for cmd in the taskbar (Windows 10) or the Start menu (Windows 10-Vista).
2. Select cmd.
3. At the C:\ prompt, type Telnet and then press <Enter>. The computer returns a
display similar to the one shown in figure 80.
Figure 82.
Telnet Window
Telnet Tips
It is not the intention of this guide to detail all of the operations and functionality of Telnet;
however, some basic level of understanding is necessary for operating the XTP CrossPoint
Series matrix switcher via Telnet.
Open
Connect to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher using the Open command. Once you
are connected to the matrix switcher, you can enter the SIS commands the same as you
would if you were using the RS-232 of RS-422 link.
Connect to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher as follows:
1. At the Telnet prompt, type open <IP address> and then press <Enter>.
If the matrix switcher is not password-protected, no further prompts are displayed
until you break or disconnect the connection to the matrix switcher.
If the matrix switcher is password-protected, Telnet displays the password prompt.
2. If necessary, at the password prompt, type the appropriate password and then press
<Enter>.
Connection to the matrix switcher via the Ethernet can be password-protected. There
are two levels of password protection: administrator and user. A person logged on as
an administrator has full access to all matrix switcher switching capabilities and editing
functions. Users can create ties, set mutes, and view all settings with the exception of
passwords. By default, the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher is shipped with both
passwords set to <carriage return>.
Once you are logged in, the matrix switcher returns either Login Administrator or Login
User. No further prompts are displayed until you break or disconnect the connection to the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher.
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
153
Escape character and Esc key
When Telnet is first started, the utility advises that the Escape character is ‘Ctrl+]’. Many
SIS commands include the keyboard <Esc> key. Consequently, some confusion may exist
between the Escape character and the Escape key.
The Telnet Escape character is a key combination, the <Ctrl> key and the <]> key pressed
simultaneously, which returns you to the Telnet prompt while leaving the connection to the
XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher intact.
The Escape key is the <Esc> key on the computer keyboard. Use this key for SIS
commands.
Analog echo
Once connected to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher, by default, Telnet does not
display your keystrokes on the screen. SIS commands are typed in blindly and only the
SIS responses are displayed on the screen. To command Telnet to show keystrokes, at
the Telnet prompt, type set analog_echo and then press <Enter> before you open the
connection to the matrix switcher.
With analog echo turned on, keystrokes and the responses of the matrix switcher are
displayed on the same line. For example: 1*1!In1 Out1 All, where 1*1! is the SIS
command and In1 Out1 All is the response.
With analog echo turned on, all keystrokes are displayed, even those that should be
masked, such as the password entry. For example, when entering a password with analog
echo turned on, you see a display such as a*d*m*i*n*, where admin is the keyed in
password and ***** is the masked response.
You can turn off analog echo by typing unset analog_echo and then pressing <Enter>
at the Telnet prompt. If you are connected to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher
and need to access the Telnet prompt to turn analog echo off, type the Escape character
(<Ctrl>+<]>).
Set carriage return-line feed
Unless commanded otherwise, Telnet transmits a line feed character only (no carriage
return) to the connected matrix switcher when you press the <Enter> key. This is the
correct setting for SIS communication with the matrix switcher. The Telnet set crlf
command forces Telnet to transmit carriage return and line feed characters when <Enter>
is pressed, but if crlf is set, the SIS link with the matrix switcher does not function properly.
Close
To close the link to the matrix switcher, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape
character (<Ctrl>+<]>). At the Telnet prompt, type close, and then press <Enter>.
Help
For Telnet command definitions, at the Telnet prompt, type ? and then press <Enter>.
Quit
Exit the Telnet utility by typing quit and then pressing <Enter> at the Telnet prompt. If you
are connected to the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher, access the Telnet prompt by
typing the Escape character (<Ctrl>+<]>).
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
154
Subnetting — a Primer
It is not the purpose of this guide to describe TCP/IP protocol in detail. However, some
understanding of TCP/IP subnetting (a subnet is a subset of a network — a set of IP devices
that have portions of their IP addresses in common) is necessary in order to understand
the interaction of the XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher and the mail server gateway.
To understand subnetting at the level required to install and operate the XTP CrossPoint
Series matrix switcher, you must understand the concepts of a gateway, analog and remote
devices, IP addresses and octets, and subnet masks and octets.
Gateways
The XTP CrossPoint Series matrix switcher can communicate with the e-mail server that
the matrix switcher uses for e-mail notification directly (if they are on the same subnet) or
the communication can be routed via a gateway (a computer that provides a link between
different subnets).
Analog and Remote Devices
The analog and remote devices are defined from the point of view of the function being
described. In this guide, subnetting is an issue when you are using the controlling PC to set
TCP/IP and e-mail values in the matrix switcher (see Email Settings Page on page 130).
When you are setting up the variables for e-mail notification, which may include subnetting,
the matrix switcher is the analog device and the e-mail server is the remote device.
IP Addresses and Octets
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields, properly called
“octets,” separated by dots (periods) (see figure 83). Each octet can be numbered from 000
through 255. Leading zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional. Values of 256
and above are invalid.
Typical IP Address: 192.168.254.254
Octets
Figure 83.
Typical IP Address
Subnet Masks and Octets
The subnet mask (see figure 84) is used to determine whether the analog and remote
devices are on the same subnet or different subnets. The subnet mask consists of four
numeric octets separated by dots. Each octet can be numbered from 000 through 255.
Leading zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional. Each octet typically contains
either 255 or 0. The octets determine whether or not the same octets of two IP addresses
will be compared when determining if two devices are on the same subnet.
0 indicates that this octet will not be
compared between two IP addresses.
255 indicates that this octet will be
compared between two IP addresses.
Typical Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0
Octets
Figure 84.
Typical Subnet Mask
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
155
Determining Whether Devices Are on the Same Subnet
To determine the subnet, the IP address of the analog device is compared to the IP address
of the remote device (see figure 85). The octets of each address are compared or not
compared, depending on the value in the related subnet mask octet.
•
If a subnet mask octet contains the value 255, the related octets of the IP addresses of
the analog device and the remote device are unmasked.
Unmasked octets are compared (indicated by ? in figure 85).
•
If the subnet mask octet contains the value 0, the related octets of the IP addresses of
the analog device and remote device are masked.
Masked octets are not compared (indicated by X in figure 85).
If the unmasked octets of the two IP addresses match (indicated by = in figure 85, example 1),
the two addresses are on the same subnet.
If the two unmasked fields do not match (indicated by ≠ in figure 85, example 2 and
example 3), the addresses are not on the same subnet.
Local IP Address:
Subnet Mask:
Remote IP Address:
Match?:
Figure 85.
Example 1
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
192.168.2.25
=.=.X.X — Match
(Same subnet)
Example 2
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
190.190.2.25
≠.≠.X.X — No match
(Different subnet)
Example 3
192.168.254.254
255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)
192.190.2.25
=.≠.X.X — No match
(Different subnet)
Comparing the IP Addresses of the Analog and Remote Devices
XTP CrossPoint Series • Ethernet Connection
156
Extron Warranty
Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years
from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty
workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components,
to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is
returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:
USA, Canada, South America,
and Central America:
Extron Electronics
1230 South Lewis Street
Anaheim, CA 92805
U.S.A.
Asia:
Extron Asia Pte Ltd
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01
PM Industrial Bldg.
Singapore 368363
Singapore
Japan:
Extron Electronics, Japan
Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082
Japan
Europe:
Extron Europe
Hanzeboulevard 10
3825 PH Amersfoort
The Netherlands
China:
Extron China
686 Ronghua Road
Songjiang District
Shanghai 201611
China
Middle East:
Extron Middle East
Dubai Airport Free Zone
F13, PO Box 293666
United Arab Emirates, Dubai
Africa:
Extron South Africa
South Tower
160 Jan Smuts Avenue
Rosebank 2196, South Africa
This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical
or mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not
authorized by Extron.
NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return
Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.
USA:
714.491.1500 or 800.633.9876
Europe: 31.33.453.4040 or 800.3987.6673
Africa: 27.11.447.6162
Asia:
65.6383.4400
Japan:
Middle East:
81.3.3511.7655
971.4.299.1800
Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage
during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the
name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.
Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality,
performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct,
indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been
advised of such damage.
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may
not apply to you.
Worldwide Headquarters: Extron USA West, 1025 E. Ball Road, Anaheim, CA 92805, 800.633.9876
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement